jvtr^L*i  r 


Mto 

1ED  SCIENTIFIC 


ittertttftc 

AstroUgg 


BY  MAX  HEINDEL 


A  COMPLETE  TEXTBOOK  ON  THE 
ART  OF  ERECTING  A  HOROSCOPE 

WITH 

Philosophic  Encyclopedia 

and 
TABLES  OF  PLANETARY  HOURS 


FIFTH  EDITION 


International  Headquarters 

MT.  ECCLESIA 
OCEANSIDE,  CALIFORNIA 


LONDON  : 
L.  N.  FOWLER  &  Co.,  7  IMPERIAL  ARCADE 

LUDGATE  CIRCUS 


COPYRIGHT  1919 

BY 

MRS.  MAX  HEINDEL 

FELLOWSHIP  PRESS 

OCEANSIDE,   CALIFORNIA 


Printed  in  the  United  States  of  America 


INTRODUCTION 

THE  PRACTICAL  VALUE  OF  ASTROLOGY 

THERE  is  a  side  of  the  Moon  which  we  never  see, 
but  that  hidden  half  is  as  potent  a  factor  in  caus- 
ing the  ebb  and  flow  of  the  earth's  tide,  as  the  part  of 
the  Moon  which  is  visible.  Similarly,  there  is  an  in- 
visible part  of  man  which  exerts  a  powerful  influence 
in  life,  and  as  the  tides  are  measured  by  the  motion 
of  the  Sun  and  Moon,  so  also  the  eventualities  of  ex- 
istence are  measured  by  the  circling  stars,which  may 
therefore  be  called  the  ' '  Clock  of  Destiny, ' '  and  know- 
ledge of  their  import  is  an  immense  power,for  to  the 
competent  astrologer  the  horoscope  reveals  every 
secret  of  life. 

Thus,  when  you  have  given  an  astrologer  the  data 
of  your  birth,  you  have  given  him  the  key  to  your  in- 
nermost soul,  and  there  is  no  secret  that  he  may  not 
ferret  out.  This  knowledge  may  be  used  for  good  or 
ill,  to  help  or  hurt,  according  to  the  nature  of  the 
man.  Only  a  tried  friend  should  be  trusted  with  this 
key  to  your  soul,  and  it  should  never  be  given  to  any 
one  base  enough  to  prostitute  a  spiritual  science  for 
material  gain. 

To  the  medical  man  Astrology  is  invaluable  in 
diagnosing  diseases  and  prescribing  a  remedy,  for  it 

1 


2098249 


2  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

reveals  the  hidden  cause  of  all  ailments.  This  phase 
of  the  science  is  dealt  with  in  "The  Message  of  the 
Stars,"  giving  numerous  horoscopes  to  show  how 
the  signatures  of  various  diseases  appear  in  the  stel- 
lar script.  The  writer  diagnoses  unerringly  by  this 
method  the  ailments  of  patients  all  over  the  world  and 
love  will  light  the  way  for  others  also  who  aim  to  fol- 
low in  the  steps  of  Christ  as  healers  of  the  sick. 

If  you  are  a  parent  the  horoscope  will  aid  you  to 
detect  the  evil  latent  in  your  child  and  teach  you  how 
to  apply  the  ounce  of  prevention.  It  will  show  you 
the  good  points  also,  that  you  may  make  a  better  man 
or  woman  of  the  soul  entrusted  to  your  care.  It  will 
reveal  systemic  weakness  and  enable  you  to  guard  the 
health  of  your  child;  it  will  show  what  talents  are 
there,  and  how  the  life  may  be  lived  to  a  maximum 
of  usefulness.  Therefore,  the  message  of  the  march- 
ing orbs  is  most  important,  and  as  we  have  shown  the 
great  danger  of  giving  birth  data  to  anyone  else, 
there  remains  only  one  course:  To  study  the  science 
yourself. 

This  book  and  the  simplified  method  it  contains 
of  casting  a  horoscope  in  a  thoroughly  scientific  man- 
ner is  published  in  order  to  enable  anyone  who  can 
add  and  subtract  to  do  the  work  himself,  instead  of 
relying  on  others.  Thus  he  will  obtain  a  deeper  know- 
ledge of  the  causes  which  are  operative  in  life  than 
any  professional  astrologer  who  is  a  stranger  can 
give. 


CHAPTER  I. 

THE  PLANETS : 
THE  SEVEN  SPIRITS  BEFORE  THE  THRONE 

THE  nebular  theory  explains  with  wonderful  in- 
genuity the  material  viewpoint  of  how  a  solar 
system  consisting  of  sun  and  planets  may  be  formed 
from  a  central  firemist,  provided  the  firemist  is  put 
in  motion.  Something  or  somebody  extraneous  to 
the  firemist  is  necessary  to  give  that  first  impulse, 
however,  as  shown  by  Herbert  Spencer,  who  rejected 
the  nebular  theory  because  it  implies  a  First  Cause, 
yet  he  was  unable  to  enunciate  a  hypothesis  free 
from  that,  to  him,  objectionable  flaw.  Thus  the  scien- 
tific theory  of  the  genesis  of  a  solar  system  coincides 
with  the  religious  teaching  of  a  First  Cause,  call  it 
God  or  by  any  other  name,  who  is  the  superior  intel- 
ligence ordering  the  path  of  the  marching  orbs  with 
a  definite  end  and  aim  in  view.  That  end  we  may 
not  yet  be  able  to  wholly  perceive,  but  all  about  us  on 
our  planet  we  cannot  fail  to  note,  if  observant,  an 
orderly  progression  of  all  things  towards  perfection, 
and  it  may  be  inferred  that  a  similar  procesii 
of  evolution  must  be  in  progress  on  all  the  other  plan- 
ets, varying  of  course,  in  consonance  with  the  diverse 
conditions  existing  on  each. 

3 


4  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Mystic  teaching  concerning  the  formation  of  a 
solar  system  agrees  with  the  nebular  theory  which 
says  that  rings  were  thrown  off  from  the  central  mass 
of  the  Sun,  forming  in  succession  the  several  planets, 
those  farthest  from  the  Sun  being  formed  first  while 
Venus  and  Mercury,  last  formed,  are  nearest  the  Sun. 

Back  of  every  act  is  a  thought,  and  behind  every 
visible  phenemenon  there  is  an  invisible  cause.  So 
with  the  formation  of  the  planets  in  a  solar  system, 
there  is  a  spiritual  reason  for  their  being,  as  well  as 
a  material  explanation. 

The  central  firemist  we  may  consider  the  first  vis- 
ible manifestation  of  the  triune  God,  the  Lord  of 
Hosts,  Who  contains  within  His  Being  a  multitude 
of  other  beings  at  varying  stages  of  development. 
Their  diverse  needs  require  different  external  envir- 
onments. In  order  to  furnish  such  proper  conditions 
several  planets  have  been  thrown  off  from  the  central 
mass,  each  being  differently  constituted  and  each  hav- 
ing a  climatic  condition  varying  from  the  others.  Yet 
they  are  all  in  the  kingdom  of  God,  the  solar  system. 
"In  Him  they  live  and  move  and  have  their  being" 
in  the  most  literal  sense,  for  the  whole  solar  system 
may  be  considered  as  the  body  of  God  and  the  planets 
as  the  organs  in  that  body,  ensouled  by  His  Life,  mov- 
ing in  His  Strength  in  accord  with  His  Will. 

Each  visible  planet  is  the  embodiment  of  a  great 
and  exalted  spiritual  intelligence  Who  is  the  minister 
of  God  in  that  department  of  His  Kingdom,  endeav- 


THE  SEVEN  SPIRITS  BEFORE  THE  THRONE  5 

oring  to  carry  out  His  Will,  the  latter  having  in  view 
the  ultimate  highest  good,  regardless  of  temporary  ill. 

These  Planetary  Spirits  exercise  a  particular  in- 
fluence on  the  beings  who  evolve  upon  the  planet 
which  is  Their  embodiment,  but  have  also  an  influence 
on  the  evolving  beings  upon  other  planets  according 
to  the  development  attained  by  such  beings.  The 
lower  in  the  scale  of  evolution  a  being  is  placed  the 
more  potent  are  the  effects  of  the  planetary  influences ; 
the  higher,  the  wiser  and  the  more  individualized  a 
being  is,  the  more  it  is  able  to  shape  its  own  course 
and  the  less  it  will  be  actuated  by  the  stellar  vibra- 
tions. That  is  why  Astrology  applied  to  daily  life 
helps  us.  It  gives  us  a  knowledge  of  our  weaknesses 
and  the  tendencies  to  evil  in  our  nature ;  it  shows  us 
our  strength  and  the  times  most  opportune  for  devel- 
opment of  added  power  for  good. 

In  all  religions  we  hear  of  the  Seven  Planetary 
Genii:  the  Hindu  tells  of  Seven  Rishi,  the  Parsi  of 
Seven  AmesTiaspentas,  the  Mohammedan  of  Seven 
Archangels  and  our  Christian  religion  has  its  Seven 
Spirits  before  the  Throne. 

The  modern  astronomer  divorces  the  spiritual  as- 
pect of  the  celestial  science,  Astrology,  which  he  pooh- 
poohs  as  "an  exploded  superstition,"  from  the  mater- 
ial phase,  Astronomy,  counting  eight  primary  planets 
in  our  solar  system — Neptune,  Uranus,  Saturn,  Ju- 
piter, Mars,  Earth,  Venus  and  Mercury.  He  shows 
through  the  telescope  that  they  exist  and  thinks  he 


6  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

has  proved  that  religion  knows  not  whereof  it  speaks 
when  it  asserts  that  there  are  seven  planets  in  the 
solar  system.  The  Mystic,  however,  points  to  Bode's 
Law  as  vindicating  his  assertion  that  Neptune  does 
not  really  belong  to  our  solar  system. 

The  law  is  this :  If  we  write  a  series  of  4  's,  add  3 
to  the  second,  6  to  the  third,  12  to  the  fourth,  etc., 
doubling  the  amount  added  each  time,  the  resulting 
series  of  numbers  is  a  very  close  approximation  to 
the  relative  distances  of  the  planets  from  the  Sun 
with  the  exception  of  Neptune.  Thus,  to  illustrate: 

Mer-                                     Aster-  Ju-      Sat-     Ura-  Nep- 

cury  Venus  Earth  Mars    oids   piter     urn      nus  tune 

44            444444  4 

3           6       12        24       48        96      192  384 


4  7          10        16         28        52       100       196        388 

If  we  divide  this  series  by  10  we  get  1  for  the  dis- 
tance of  the  earth  from  the  Sun  and  the  other  num- 
bers then  represent  the  distances  of  the  other  planets 
in  terms  of  the  earth's  distance.  The  closeness  with 
which  this  simple  law  gives  the  distance  is  shown  as 
follows,  the  column  headed  "Bode"  being  the  dis- 
tances according  to  this  law,  while  the  column  headed 
"Distance"  gives  the  correct  values  in  terms  of  the 
earth's  distances. 

Dis-  Dis- 

Bode  tance  Bode  tance 

Mercury 0.4      0.4           Jupiter 5.2  5.2 

Venus 0.7      0.7          Saturn 10.0  9.5 

Earth.                  1.0      1.0           Uranus 19.6  19.2 

Mars 1.6      1.5           Neptune 38.8  30.0 

Asteroids....      2.8      2.6 


THE  SEVEN  SPIRITS  BEFORE  THE  THRONE  7 

It  is  thus  seen  that,  with  the  exception  of  the  val- 
ues for  Neptune,  the  numbers  represent  very  nearly 
the  relative  proportional  distances  from  the  Sun,  of 
the  seven  planets  and  the  Asteroids  which  are  within 
our  solar  system,  but  fail  very  decidedly  when  applied 
to  Neptune,  who  is  the  embodiment  of  a  Great  Spirit 
from  the  Creative  Hierarchies,  which  normally  in- 
fluence  us  from  the  Zodiac.  This  planetary  genius 
works  specifically  with  those  who  are  preparing  for 
initiation  and  partially  with  those  who  study  astrol- 
ogy and  put  it  into  practice  in  their  daily  lives,  for 
then  they  are  also  preparing  for  the  path  of  attain- 
ment. The  twinklings  of  the  fixed  stars  from  without 
our  solar  system  are  the  pulsations  of  spiritual  im- 
pulses sent  forth  by  the  guardians  of  the  Greater 
Mysteries;  and  the  Mercurians,  the  Gods  of  "Wisdom 
send  out  similar  impulses  pertaining  to  the  lesser 
mysteries,  hence  Mercury  twinkles  like  a  fixed  star. 

Planets  revolve  around  the  Sun  at  varying  rates 
of  speed,  the  smaller  planets,  which  are  the  closest  to 
the  Sun,  moving  much  more  rapidly  than  the  larger 
ones  which,  in  addition,  describe  wider  circles. 

Mercury    makes  orbital  revolution  in 88          days. 

Venus          "  "  "  " 224%         " 

Earth  "  "  "  ' 365*4         " 

Mars  "  "  "  ' .  1  yr.  322  « 

Jupiter         "  "  "  ' 12       years. 

Saturn          "  "  "  ' 29% 

Uranus         "  "  "  ' 84 

Neptune       "  «  "  " 165  " 


8  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

The  hourly  motion  of  the  planets  in  their  orbits 
is  as  follows: 

Miles  Miles 

Mercury 104,000       Jupiter. 29,000 

Venus 77,000       Saturn 21,000 

Earth 65,000       Uranus 15,000 

Mars 53,000       Neptune 12,000 

Besides  revolving  in  their  orbits  around  the  Sun, 
the  planets  also  revolve  upon  their  axes  in  the  same 
direction  as  they  revolve  in  their  orbits ;  that  is,  from 
west  to  east.  This  movement  is  called  the  diurnal 
rotation. 

The  time  occupied  by  the  diurnal  rotation  of  the 
planets  is  as  follows: 

Hours  Hours 

Mercury 24^        Jupiter 10 

Venus 23%         Saturn 10% 

Earth 24  Uranus 9% 

Mars 24%        Neptune Unknown 

The  Sun  also  rotates  upon  an  axis  but  requires 
about  608  hours  or  25  1-3  days  to  complete  one  ro- 
tation. 

The  axis  of  a  planet  may  be  either  perpendicular 
or  oblique  to  its  orbit.  The  present  approximate  in- 
clinations of  the  axes  are  as  follows : 

Degrees  Degrees 

Jupiter 3           Venus 60 

Earth 23%         Mercury 72 

Mars 25            Uranus 102 

Saturn 26            Neptune 155 


THE  SEVEN  SPIRITS  BEFORE  THE  THRONE  9 

The  inclination  of  the  axis  of  the  Sun  to  the  plane 
of  the  ecliptic  is  about  iy2  degrees. 

The  above  inclinations  of  the  axes  do  not  in  all 
cases  coincide  with  the  figures  given  by  physical 
science,  neither  do  we  endorse  their  view  that  these 
inclinations  remain  practically  unchanged,  save  for 
a  slight  vibratory  movement  called  nutation.  There 
is  an  exceedingly  slow  third  movement  of  the  planets 
whereby  that  which  is  now  the  North  Pole  of  the 
earth  will  in  the  future,  as  it  has  in  the  past,  point 
directly  towards  the  Sun.  Later  it  will  be  in  the 
position  where  now  the  South  Pole  is,  and  in  due 
time  it  will  reach  again  its  present  place.  Thus  trop- 
ical climate  and  glacial  epochs  succeed  each  other  on 
all  points  of  each  planet. 

In  addition  to  this  gradual  movement  of  about  50 
seconds  of  space  per  century,  whereby  a  whole  revo- 
lution of  the  earth's  axis  is  completed  in  about  two 
and  one-half  million  years,  there  have  also  been  sud- 
den changes  at  a  time  when  that  which  is  now  the 
North  Pole  pointed  directly  towards  the  Sun.  The 
southern  hemisphere  was  then  continually  in  dark- 
ness and  cold. 

Resulting  conditions  caused  a  sudden  overtop- 
ping of  our  globe  the  last  time.  Since  that  time,  how- 
ever, the  Spirit  which  previously  guided  the  earth 
from  without  has  drawn  into  the  sphere  and  such 
a  happening  will  be  impossible  in  the  future. 


10  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Mr.  Pierre  Bezian,  a  French  mechanician,  has  con- 
structed an  apparatus  demonstrating  this  third  move- 
ment. He  is  said  to  have  received  his  idea  from  a 
study  of  the  teachings  promulgated  among  various 
ancient  people  by  priests  possessed  of  mystic  learn- 
ing, particularly  from  the  Egyptians.  He  shows  how 
such  a  third  movement  will  account  for  the  tropical 
flora  and  fauna  found  in  the  frozen  North,  which  can 
be  accounted  for  in  no  other  way.  He  also  shows  that 
when  in  the  course  of  this  third  movement  the  in- 
clination of  a  planet's  axis  becomes  greater  than  90 
degrees  and  its  North  Pole  commences  to  point  to- 
ward the  south,  the  satellites  of  that  planet  will  seem 
to  turn  in  the  opposite  direction  from  the  satellites 
of  the  other  planets,  as  is  the  case  with  Uranus  and 
Neptune's  satellites;  a  fact  which  astronomers  are 
puzzled  to  explain. 

On  Uranus  and  Neptune  the  Sun  also  rises  in  the 
west  and  sets  in  the  east  for  the  same  reason:  the 
inversion  of  their  poles. 

As  a  last  difference  between  the  teachings  of  mod- 
ern science  and  the  Western  Wisdom  Teaching  of  the 
Rosicrucians,  we  may  note  that  astronomers  of  today 
speak  of  Venus  and  Mercury  as  inferior  planets  be- 
cause they  always  appear  close  to  the  Sun;  Venus  is 
seen  only  as  a  morning  or  an  evening  star;  Mercury 
is  rarely  seen  because  it  keeps  so  close  to  the  Sun. 

The  other  planets  are  called  superior  because  they 
are  seen  at  all  distances  from  the  Sun,  being  even  at 


THE  SEVEN  SPIRITS  BEFORE  THE  THRONE  11 

the  very  opposite  point  of  the  horizon  from  the  Sun. 

This  appellation,  inferior  and  superior,  the  mys- 
tic would  reverse,  for  to  him  it  is  clear  that  the  Sun 
is  the  embodiment  of  the  highest  spiritual  intelli- 
gence in  our  system.  At  the  beginning  of  our  pres- 
ent phase  of  evolution  all  that  is  now  outside  the  Sun 
was  inside,  but  not  all  beings  could  continue  to  vi- 
brate at  the  immense  rate  which  obtained  there ;  some 
fell  behind,  crystallized  and,  in  time,  became  a  clog 
on  other  classes.  They  started  to  crystallize  at  the 
pole,  where  motion  is  slow,  but  gradually  their  in- 
creased weight  brought  them  to  the  equator,  where 
motion  is  most  rapid,  and  they  were  thrown  off  from 
the  Sun  by  centrifugal  force. 

Later,  other  beings  failed  to  keep  up  the  vibratory 
movement,  lagged  behind,  and  were  thrown  off  at  a 
proper  distance  so  that  the  solar  vibrations  may  give 
them  the  rapidity  necessary  to  their  development. 

The  most  advanced  spirits  stayed  longest  with  the 
Sun  and  consequently,  if  the  appellation  inferior  and 
superior  is  to  be  applied  at  all,  it  should  be  used  in 
reverse  manner. 

In  order  to  avoid  all  misunderstanding,  it  may  be 
well  to  state  that  Jupiter  was  thrown  off  and  given 
its  enormous  bulk  of  fiery  substance  because  the  Ju- 
piterians  had  arrived  at  a  very  high  state  of  devel- 
opment, where  they  needed  both  high  vibrations  a^d 
independent  motion.  Jupiter  is  therefore  in  some  re- 


12  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

spects  an  exception  to  the  rule ;  a  case  where  a  higher 
law  supersedes  a  lower. 

In  conclusion  we  reiterate  that  the  planets  in  our 
solar  system  are  the  visible  embodiments  of  the  Seven 
Spirits  before  the  Throne  of  God,  the  Sun,  and  that 
just  as  it  is  possible  to  us  to  transmit  by  wireless 
telegraphy  the  force  which  moves  the  telegraph  key, 
lights  a  lamp,  pulls  a  lever,  etc.,  so  may  these  Great 
Spirits  exercise  an  influence  upon  human  beings  in 
proportion  to  our  stage  of  individuality.  If  we  aim 
to  act  in  harmony  with  the  laws  of  Good,  we  rise 
above  all  other  laws  and  become  a  law  unto  ourselves ; 
co-workers  with  God  and  helpers  in  nature.  Ours 
is  the  privilege,  ours  the  loss,  if  we  fail  to  live  up  to 
our  highest  possibilities. 

Let  us  therefore,  strive  to  know,  that  we  may  do, 
and,  above  all  let  us  beware  of  prostituting  the  science 
of  the  stars  to  the  gutter  of  fortune-telling.  Gold  of 
Mammon  may  be  ours  if  we  do,  but  the  ' '  peace  of  God 
which  passeth  all  understanding"  will  bring  us  last- 
ing joy  if  we  use  our  knowledge  in  unselfish  service 
to  others. 


CHAPTER  II. 

TIME  AND  PLACE  AS  FACTORS  IN  CALCULATION 
OF  THE  HOROSCOPE. 

A  HOROSCOPE  is  simply  a  chart  of  the  heavens 
showing  a  certain  position  of  the  planets  and  zo- 
diacal signs  relative  to  each  other  and  the  earth.  The 
constellations  remain  in  the  same  position  one  to 
another,  and  are  therefore  called  ''fixed  stars,"  but 
the  earth  and  other  planets  constantly  change.  They 
do  not  return  to  the  same  relative  position  until  after 
about  twenty-six  thousand  years.  Thus  every  scienti- 
fically calculated  horoscope  is  absolutely  individual 
and  shows  a  stellar  influence  different  from  that  exer- 
ted in  any  other  life  commenced  at  a  different  time. 
Because  of  the  revolution  of  the  earth  upon  its  axis 
a  new  degree  of  the  zodiac  rises  every  four  minutes 
and  thus  even  the  horoscopes  of  twins  may  differ  con- 
siderably. The  student  will  therefore  realize  the  im- 
portance of  Time  as  a  factor  in  casting  a  horoscope. 
There  are  however,  various  methods  of  approximat- 
ing the  time  and  erecting  a  correct  horoscope  for 
those  who  do  not  know  the  hour  of  their  birth,  but 
that  subject  belongs  to  an  advanced  grade  of  this 
study. 

13 


14  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Time  is  not  the  same  the  world  over,  however. 
When  the  Sun  rises  where  we  live,  it  sets  in  another 
place,  and  that  makes  another  difference  in  the  horo- 
scopes even  if  cast  for  children  born  at  the  same  mo- 
ment of  time  but  in  opposite  parts  of  the  world,  for 
if  it  were  noon  in  the  birthplace  of  one,  the  Sun  would 
be  high  in  the  heavens  above  the  earth,  and  in  the 
birthplace  of  the  other  child  it  would  be  midnight 
with  the  Sun  directly  below  the  earth.  We  know  that 
the  chemical  effect  of  the  solar  ray  varies  with  its  po- 
sition, and  when  the  change  is  physically  noticeable, 
the  spiritual  effect  must  also  differ.  It  is  therefore 
evident  that  Time  and  Place  are  the  basic  factors  in 
calculation  of  the  horoscope.  We  shall  first  show  how 
to  locate  the  place  of  birth,  then  we  take  up  the  mat- 
ter of  time. 

PLACE 

Geographically,  the  earth  is  divided  by  two  imag- 
inary sets  of  circles.  One  circle  runs  east  and  west, 
halfway  between  the  North  and  South  Poles  as  shown 
in  the  accompanying  charts :  it  is  called  the  Equator. 
Other  circles  called  Parallels  of  Latitude,  are  imagin- 
ed running  parallel  to  the  Equator,  and  their  use  is 
to  measure  the  distance  of  any  place  North  or  South 
of  the  Equator.  Now  get  an  atlas  and  look  at  the 
map  of  North  America.  Along  the  right  and  left 
hand  borders  you  will  see  certain  numbers.  Note  that 
a  curved  line  runs  from  No.  50  on  the  right  to  No.  50 
on  the  left.  That  is  the  fiftieth  parallel  of  latitude. 


TIME  AND  PLACE  15 

All  cities  along  that  line,  in  America,  Europe  or  Asia 
are  equidistant  from  the  Equator,  and  said  to  be  lo- 
cated in  ''Latitude  50  North." 

Another  line  runs  from  number  40  on  the  left  bor- 
der to  number  40  on  the  right.  Let  us  note  some  of 
the  principal  cities  on  or  near  this  line.  San  Fran- 
cisco is  a  little  further  south,  Denver  right  on  the  line, 
Chicago  and  New  York  a  trifle  north.  Now  turn  to 
the  map  of  Europe.  There  the  right  and  left  hand 
numbers  with  their  connecting  circles  are  also  lati- 
tudes, and  at  the  number  40  you  will  see  Lisbon  and 
Madrid.  Proceeding  eastwards  Eome  and  Constanti- 
nople appear  a  little  to  the  north  of  our  line. 

These  places  may  be  said,  for  the  purposes  of  ele- 
mentary instruction,  to  be  in  the  same  degree  of  lati- 
tude, and  therefore  another  determinator  must  be 
used  to  differentiate  the  location  of  each  place  from 
all  others. 

This  is  accomplished  by  dividing  the  earth  longi- 
tudinally from  pole  to  pole  by  another  set  of  imagi- 
nary circles  called  Meridians  of  Longitude,  and 
shown  in  our  chart.  All  places  along  such  circles 
have  noon  at  the  same  instant,  regardless  of  how  far 
they  are  from  the  Equator,  or  whether  near  the  North 
or  South  Pole. 

Now  look  again  at  your  map  of  Europe.  There 
you  will  see  numbered  lines  running  from  the  top  of 
the  map  to  the  bottom.  These  are  the  lines  of  longi- 
tude. One  is  numbered  0.  If  you  follow  that  line 

2 


16 


SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 


TIME  AND  PLACE  17 

you  will  find  London,  and  close  thereto  a  place  called 
Greenwich.  That  is  the  location  of  the  world's  great- 
est observatory,  and  for  purposes  of  astronomical 
calculation  all  places  on  earth  are  considered  as  being 
so  and  so  many  degrees  west  or  east  of  Greenwich. 

Thus,  by  latitude  we  obtain  the  location  of  a  cer- 
tain place  north  or  south  of  the  Equator. 

By  longitude  we  designate  its  position  east  or  west 
of  Greenwich. 

When  the  location  of  a  place  is  stated  in  terms  of 
latitude  and  longitude  it  marks  a  certain  spot  beyond 
all  possibility  of  confusion  with  any  other  place, 
and  gives  the  astrologer  one  of  the  primal  factors 
necessary  to  calculate  a  scientific  horoscope — place. 

Latitude  is  the  principal  factor  in  locating  the 
signs  of  the  zodiac  by  means  of  "Tables  of  Houses," 
which  apply  to  all  places  in  a  certain  degree  of  lati- 
tude. These  tables  are  as  nearly  unchangeable  as  the 
fixed  stars  to  which  they  apply;  they  remain  the  same 
from  year  to  year,  at  least  the  change  is  so  small  as  to 
be  unappreciable  in  a  lifetime. 

Longitude  is  the  prime  factor  in  all  calculations 
connected  with  the  movable  planets.  To  calculate 
their  places  at  the  time  of  a  person's  birth  it  is  nec- 
essary to  have  an  astronomical  almanac  for  the  year 
of  birth.  This  is  called  an  ephemeris  because  it  re- 
cords the  ephemeral  or  momentary  position  of  the 
planets  as  seen  from  the  observatory  at  Greenwich 
each  day  at  noon. 


18  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

TIME 

A  Solar  Day  is  the  period  of  time  it  takes  the  Sun 
to  move  from  any  certain  meridian  of  longitude  till 
it  returns  to  the  same  meridian  the  next  day.  Owing 
to  the  variable  motion  of  the  earth  in  its  orbit,  and 
the  obliquity  of  the  ecliptic,  the  Sun's  path,  the 
solar  days  are  not  all  of  equal  length,  but  as  the  pur- 
poses of  social  and  civil  life  require  a  uniform  di- 
vision an  average  is  struck  of  all  solar  days  in  a  year, 
and  this  is  called  a  Mean  Solar  Day.  It  commences 
at  midnight  when  the  Sun  is  at  the  nadir.  Clocks 
are  regulated  to  show  its  beginning  and  end,  also  its 
equal  divisions  into  twenty-four  hours.  There  is 
thus  a  difference  between  sun-time  and  clock-time. 

From  the  time  when  the  Sun  is  nearest  to  the  earth 
(perihelion)  December  24th,  to  the  time  when  it  is 
farthest  from  the  earth  (aphelion)  June  21st,  clock- 
time  is  in  advance  of  sun-time.  From  June  21st  to 
December  24th,  the  Sun  is  in  advance  of  the  clock,  the 
greatest  difference  being  16  minute.8  in  the  beginning 
of  November. 

When  the  unequal  motion  of  the  earth  in  its  orbit 
and  the  obliquity  of  the  ecliptic  act  together,  the  dif- 
ference between  sun-time  and  clock-time  is  greatest 
but  four  times  a  year,  April  15th,  June  15th,  Septem- 
ber 1st  and  December  24th,  they  agree. 

A  Sidereal  Day  is  the  time  which  elapses  between 
a  fixed  star's  leaving  a  certain  degree  of  longitude 


TIME  AND  PLACE  19 

until  it  returns  to  it  the  following  day.  This  is  the 
exact  time  of  one  complete  revolution  of  the  earth  up- 
on its  axis;  it  is  the  only  absolutely  uniform  motion 
observed  in  the  heavens,  having  undergone  no  change 
since  the  earliest  observations  on  record. 

Owing  to  the  motion  of  the  earth  in  its  orbit  about 
the  Sun  a  solar  day  is  longer  than  a  sidereal  day,  for 
as  the  Sun  moves  farther  to  the  east  during  the  time 
of  the  earth's  daily  rotation  on  its  axis,  the  earth 
must  turn  further  upon  its  axis  before  a  certain  mer- 
idian comes  in  line  with  the  Sun.  The  solar  day  is 
therefore  about  four  minutes  longer  than  the  sider- 
eal day,  but  owing  to  the  variable  motion  of  the  earth 
in  its  orbit  and  the  obliquity  of  the  ecliptic  previous- 
ly mentioned,  this  difference  also  varies  each  day. 

In  bygone  days  clocks  in  each  city  or  hamlet  dif- 
fered from  the  timepieces  of  every  other  place  because 
all  were  set  to  local  time,  but  this  caused  much  con- 
fusion to  the  traveling  public;  therefore  America 
adopted  what  is  called  Standard  Time  on  November 
18,  1883.  For  persons  born  subsequent  to  that  date  a 
correction  is  necessary  to  convert  the  time  shown  by 
clocks  to  true  local  time,  for  that  is  the  time  used  to 
calculate  the  horoscope.  The  diagram  will  aid  stu- 
dents to  understand  what  Standard  Time  is,  how  it 
overcame  confusion,  and  how  the  before-mentioned 
correction  is  made. 

It  was  suggested,  that  if  the  country  be  divided 
into  time-zones  each  about  fifteen  degrees  of  longitude 


20  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

in  width  (this  being  the  distance  the  Sun  travels  in 
one  hour),  and  all  the  clocks  in  each  division  set  to 
one  uniform  time,  gauged  by  a  meridian  located  in 
the  middle  of  the  resulting  time-zone,  confusion  of 
travelers  would  be  avoided. 

Accordingly  America  was  divided  into  four  such 
zones  by  three  imaginary  lines,  as  illustrated  in  the 
diagram. 

In  the  Eastern  Time  Zone  clocks  are  set  true  to  the 
75th  meridian,  5  Tfiours  earlier  than  Greenwich  Mean 
Time. 

In  the  Central  Time  Zone  time  is  regulated  to  the 
90th  meridian  which  is  6  hours  earlier  than  Green- 
wich. 

In  the  Mountain  Time  Zone  timepieces  are  gov- 
erned according  to  the  105th  meridian,  7  hours 
earlier  than  Greenwich  Mean  Time. 

In  the  Pacific  Time  Zone  time  is  standard  to  the 
120th  meridian,  8  hours  earlier  than  Greenwich. 

(There  is  a  fifth  zone  in  the  far  East,  comprising 
Maine,  Nova  Scotia,  etc.  This  zone  we  omitted  in 
order  that  our  diagram  might  be  larger.) 

In  all  cities  located  on  these  Standard  Meridians 
(see  diagram  on  the  opposite  page),  such  as  Phila- 
delphia and  Denver,  standard  time  is  also  true  local 
time,  and  no  correction  is  required  in  calculation  of 
horoscopes.  But  Detroit*  which  you  will  see  located  on 
the  dividing  line  between  the  Eastern  and  Central 
Time  Zones,  is  7  degrees  east  of  the  90th  meridian, 


TIME  AND  PLACE 


21 


22  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

and  its  clocks  are  therefore  28  minutes  slow  in  actual 
fact,  for  when  they  show  noon,  according  to  the  90th 
meridian  standard,  the  true  local  time  is  28  minutes 
past  twelve.  Chicago  you  will  see  a  little  east  of  the 
90th  meridian  (2  degrees).  When  the  clocks  there 
are  twelve  noon  it  is  really  12:08.  San  Francisco 
clocks  show  noon  when  the  true  local  time  is  only 
11:50,  because  that  city  is  2^  degrees  west  of  the 
Standard  Meridian.  Correction  is  therefore  neces- 
sary. The  rule  for  obtaining  the  true  local  time  is: 

To  the  nearest  Standard  Meridian  Time,  add  four 
minutes  for  each  degree  the  birth  place  is  East  of 
the  Meridian  corresponding  to  that  Time. 

If  the  birth  place  is  West  of  that  Meridian,  sub- 
tract four  minutes  for  each  degree  it  is  "West  thereof. 
When  a  child  is  born  the  exact  moment  it  draws  its 
first  breath  should  be  noted,  as  that  moment  and  nc  i 
the  time  of  delivery  is  the  time  of  birth  from  the  as- 
trologer's point  of  view. 

The  reason  for  taking  the  time  of  the  first  inspira- 
tion, usually  accompanied  by  a  cry,  as  the  moment  of 
birth,  is  that  the  chemical  condition  of  the  atmosphere 
changes  at  each  moment  as  the  vibrations  from  the 
stars  change-  We  note  such  a  change  in  the  atmos- 
phere according  to  the  position  of  the  Sun  in  the  sky 
at  different  hours  of  the  day  or  night.  The  night  air 
is  different  from  the  atmosphere  at  noon.  These  are 
not  sudden  changes,  but  are  brought  about  by,  to  us. 
imperceptible  degrees.  We  who  are  more  callous  from 
continued  changes,  do  not  feel  them,  but  the  little 


TIME  AND  PLACE  23 

sensitive  form  of  a  new-born  child  is  eminently  sus- 
ceptible to  the  inrush  of  that  first  charge  of  its  lungs, 
and  as  the  oxygen  contained  therein  surges  through 
the  body,  by  mixture  with  the  blood  every  single  atom 
receives  a  peculiar  stamp  which  is  retained  all 
through  life,  although  atoms  change,  in  the  same  way 
that  a  scar  perpetuates  itself  on  the  body  despite  the 
change  of  atoms.  That  first  stamping  is  the  physical 
basis  of  the  idiosyncrasies  and  temperamental  char- 
acteristics which  cause  each  of  us  to  act  differently 
under  the  same  stellar  conditions  ;it  is  the  basis  of  the 
tendencies  of  our  physical  nature  and  in  harmony 
with  our  stage  of  attainment  as  required  by  the  law 
of  causation,  which  gives  us  in  each  life  the  faculties 
evolved  during  all  our  previous  existences  Thus  we 
do  not  have  a  certain  fate  because  we  are  born  at  a 
certain  moment,  but  we  have  been  brought  to  birth  at 
the  time  when  the  stellar  rays  will  give  us  the  ten- 
dency to  work  out  the  fate  generated  in  past  lives. 

This  distinction  is  very  important,'  for  it  marks 
the  difference  between  the  view  of  the  materialistic 
astrologer  and  the  religious  conception  of  Astrology. 

In  March  1918,  the  U.  S.  Goverment  passed  the 
Daylight  Saving  Act,  by  which  all  clocks  were  set 
ahead  one  hour  at  midnight  preceding  the  last  Sun- 
day in  March  and  then  set  back  one  hour  at 
midnight  preceding  the  last  Sunday  in  October.  This 
Act  was  in  force  in  1918  and  1919  only.  All  recorded 
dates  in  the  periods  affected  should  have  one  hour 
subtracted  in  order  to  obtain  Standard  Time. 


CHAPTER  III. 


SIGNS  AND  HOUSES 
SIGNS  OF  THE  ZODIAC 


T  ARIES 

8  TAURUS 

II  GEMINI 

^  CANCER 

SI  LEO 

TO?  VIRGO 


O    SUN 
5    VENUS 
!g     MERCURY 


CONJUNCTION 

OPPOSITION 

SQUARE 


=~r  LIBRA 

IH  SCORPIO 

1  SAGITTARIUS 

Ttf  CAPRICORN 

£?  AQUARIUS 

$£  PISCES 


THE  PLANETS 
])     MOON 
J?     SATURN 
U    JUPITER 

THE  ASPECTS 


$     MARS 
)#    URANUS 
tj;    NEPTUNE 


SEXTILE 
TRINE 
PARALLEL 


ALTHOUGH  we  are  many  nullions  of  miles  near- 
er the  Sun  in  winter,  its  rays  transmit  less  heat 
than  in  summer  when  we  are  farthest  from  it,  and  it 
is  therefore  evident  that  distance  has  no  effect  on 
transmission  of  heat-rays,  but  as  the  Sun  rises 
towards  the  zenith,  be  it  summer  or  winter,  the  heat 
increases,  the  greatest  heat  being  experienced  in  mid- 
summer when  sun-rays  are  nearest  the  perpendicu- 

24 


SIGNS  AND  HOUSES  25 

lar;  it  is  therefore  evident  that  the  angle  of  the  ray 
is  the  sole  determinator  of  its  influence- 

Astrology  deals  with  planetary  angles  and  their 
observed  effect  upon  mankind;  in  order  to  determine 
these  angles  and  tabulate  observations,  the  fixed  stars 
along  the  Sun's  path  have  been  divided  into  groups 
or  constellations,  and  the  earth,  as  viewed  from  the 
birthplace  of  a  child  has  been  divided  into  houses. 
Most  beginners  find  it  very  confusing  to  differentiate 
between  these  signs  and  "houses,  but  if  it  is  kept  in 
mind  that  the  signs  are  divisions  of  the  heavens,  and 
houses  are  divisions  of  the  earth,  there  should  be  no 
difficulty.  The  signs  influence  certain  parts  of  the 
body;  houses  govern  conditions  of  life. 

Like  any  other  circle,  the  zodiac  is  divided  into 
360  degrees,  each  of  the  twelve  signs  is  therefore  30 
degrees.  Their  names  and  symbols  are  given  in  the 
affixed  diagram.  The  parts  of  the  body  ruled  by  these 
signs  are  as  follows: 

ARIES    Head 

TAURUS    Cerebellum  and  Neck 

GEMINI   Arms  and  Lungs 

CANCER    Stomach 

LEO Heart  and  Spinal  Cord 

VIRGO    Intestines 

LIBRA    Kidneys 

SCORPIO Sex  Organs  and  Rectum 

SAGITTARIUS Hips  and  Thighs 

CAPRICORN    Knees 

AQUARIUS    Ankles 

PISCES    Feet 


26  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

These  twelve  constellations  are  the  natural  zodiac, 
and  ever  in  the  same  relative  positions,  but  on  account 
of  a  motion  of  the  pole  of  the  earth  the  Sun  crosses 
the  equator  at  a  slightly  different  point  each  spring 
at  the  vernal  equinox,  and  this  shifting  point  is  con- 
sidered in  Astrology  as  being  the  first  degree  of  Aries, 
the  beginning  of  what  is  called  the  intellectual  zodiac, 
which  thus  changes  from  year  to  year  at  the  rate  of 
about  50.1  seconds  per  annum,  1  degree  in  72  years,  1 
sign  in  2156  years,  completing  the  circle  of  12  signs 
in  about  25,868  years.  This  backward  movement  is 
called  ' '  precession  of  the  equinox. ' ' 

From  the  materialistic  viewpoint  there  seems  to  be 
no  reason  for  this  shifting  of  the  zodiac,  but  from  the 
position  of  the  mystic  it  is  not  at  all  arbitrary,  but 
necessary  and  in  harmony  with  the  spiral  path  of  evo- 
lution adhered  to  in  both  star  and  starfish,  observable 
everywhere  in  nature.  After  completion  of  each 
cycle,  the  intellectual  and  the  natural  zodiacs  agree 
(the  last  time  A.  D.  498),  then  a  new  world  period 
commences,  a  new  phase  of  evolution,  a  higher  loop 
of  the  spiral  whereon  we  are  ever  traveling  towards 
God.  Even  from  the  material  standpoint  it  is  evident 
that  the  spiral  path  of  the  solar  system  observed  by 
astronomers  must  change  the  angle  of  incidence  of 
the  light  rays  from  the  fixed  stars,  and  as  the  angle 
of  incidence  of  the  Sun's  rays  upon  our  earth  has  the 
effect  of  producing  the  climatic  changes  of  summer 
and  winter,  it  is  reasonable  that  a  similar  change 


SIGNS  AND  HOUSES  27 

must  follow  from  our  altered  position  relative  to  the 
fixed  stars,  which  may  account  for  gradual  changes 
of  conditions  such  as  that  the  winters  grow  less  cold 
and  the  summers  less  warm  in  certain  parts  of  the 
world. 

Furthermore,  it  has  been  observed  that  climatic 
conditions  have  a  distinct  effect  on  our  temperament 
— we  feel  differently  in  summer  than  we  do  in  winter 
— and  may  not  this  slow  change  relative  to  the  fixed 
stars  account  for  the  change  in  humanity,  which  is 
called  evolution  ?  The  mystic  affirms  that  it  does.  As 
rays  of  the  Sun,  by  change  of  the  angle  of  incidence, 
call  forth  leaves  and  flowers  from  the  plant  at  one 
time,  and  at  another  cause  them  to  wither,  so  do  rays 
from  the  fixed  stars  call  forth  and  produce  greater 
changes  in  flora  and  fauna;  they  are  responsible  for 
the  rise  and  fall  of  nations  and  the  temperamental 
change  which  we  call  civilization. 

Bringing  the  analogy  a  step  further,  the  natural 
zodiac  is  composed  of  the  constellations  as  they  are 
and  remain  in  the  heavens,  and  the  intellectual  zodiac 
commences  at  the  changing  point  where  the  Sun 
crosses  the  equator  at  the  vernal  equinox.  That  is 
the  time  when  Nature  brings  to  birth  that  which  has 
germinated  in  her  womb  during  the  preceding  win- 
ter. Thus  the  horoscope  of  the  world  changes  from 
year  to  year.  "As  above,  so  below,"  is  the  law  of 
analogy  and  the  same  salient  points  are  observaMe  in 
the  evolution  of  man  and  microbe,  stair  and  starfish. 


28  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

In  the  human  map  we  have  also  what  may  be  called 
a  natural  horoscope,  that  is  the  figure  as  cast  by  the 
rules  of  Astrology,  where  any  sign  may  be  on  the 
Ascendant,  or  First  House.  The  changing  vernal 
equinox  corresponds  to  the  first  degree  of  Aries,  in 
the  intellectual  zodiac,  so  the  Ascendant  in  any  hu- 
man horoscope  also  has  an  influence  corresponding 
to  that  degree.  The  Second  House  corresponds  to 
Taurus,  the  Third  to  Gemini,  and  so  on,  forming  the 
counterpart  of  the  intellectual  zodiac  in  the  human 
horoscope. 

As  the  rays  of  the  Sun  are  intensified  when  fo- 
cused through  a  lens,  so  is  the  spiritual  life  of  the  Sun 
when  focused  through  the  two  houses  of  Mars  to 
bring  a  life  from  the  unseen  world. 

Cancer,  the  first  of  the  watery  signs  was  pictured 
among  the  ancient  Egyptians  as  a  scarab  (beetle), 
which  was  their  emblem  of  the  soul,  and  occultists 
know  that  the  seed-atom  of  the  body  is  planted  when 
the  Sun  of  Life,  (the  Ego,) is  in  Cancer,  the  sphere  of 
the  Moon,  the  planet  of  fecundation. 

Four  months  later,  when  the  Sun  of  Life  passes 
through  the  second  of  the  watery  signs,  Scorpio, 
which  is  under  the  rulership  of  Mars,  the  planet  of 
passion  and  emotion,  the  Silver  Cord  is  tied  which 
binds  the  desire  body  to  the  lower  vehicles,  and  we 
have  the  'quickening'  when  the  foetus  first  begins  to 
show  sentient  life.  By  that  time  the  Ego  has  dissol- 
ved the  nucleated  blood  corpuscles  through  which  the 


SIGNS  AND  HOUSES  29 

mother's  life  manifested  in  the  growing  organism, 
and  it  can  then  begin  to  work  in  the  vital  fluid  and 
manifest  signs  of  separate  life  in  the  body  until  the 
Sun  of  Life  has  completed  its  circle  and  again  reaches 
the  mystic  Eighth  House. 

Eight  months  after  the  seed  atom  was  sown  the 
Sun  of  Life,  the  Spirit,  enters  Pisces,  the  last  of  the 
watery  signs  in  the  mystic  zodiac,  which  is  under  the 
expansive,  benefic  ray  of  Jupiter.  Under  this  benev- 
olent influence  the  waters  of  parturition  swell  and 
burst  the  restraining  walls  of  the  womb,  when  the 
nine  months  of  gestation  have  been  completed,  launch- 
ing the  new-born  soul  upon  the  Ocean  of  Life  at  the 
first  point  of  Aries,  where  it  is  warmed  and  cheered 
By  the  combined  rays  of  Mars  and  the  Sun,  which 
are  house  and  exaltation  rulers.  Thus  it  is  prepared 
for  the  battle  of  existence  by  the  energetic  war-god, 
and  its  fountain  of  life,  be  it  large  or  small,  is  filled 
to  capacity  by  the  Sun,  from  the  great  cosmic  reser- 
voir of  vital  energy. 

THE  HOUSES 

In  a  horoscope  the  birthplace  is  always  supposed 
to  be  the  highest  point  on  the  earth.  It  is  designated 
by  an  arrow  on  the  diagram  herewith  and  the  point 
right  above  it  in  the  sky  is  called  the  Midheaven.  As 
an  observer  in  the  northern  hemisphere  must  always 
look  south  to  see  the  noonday  Sun,  it  follows  that 
east  is  to  the  left  and  west  on  his  right.  Astrologers 


30 


SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 


call  the  eastern  horizon  the  Ascendant ,  because  at  that 
point  the  stars  rise  or  ascend  towards  the  Midheaven, 
and  for  the  reverse  reason  they  call  the  western  hori- 
zon the  Descendant.  Eays  from  stars  located  at  these 
extreme  points  would  strike  the  birthplace  at  differ- 
ent angles,  hence  their  influence  would  vary  and  there 
would  also  be  a  noticeable  difference  of  effect  at  in- 
termediate points  between  the  Horizon  and  Mid- 
heaven,  besides,  the  planets  that  have  descended  be- 
low the  earth  have  also  power,  though  not  to  the  same 
extent  as  when  above  the  birthplace.  The  influence  of 
planets  on  various  departments  of  life  has  been  ob- 
served to  be  as  follows : 


\PUICC/6/HrALTH 


SIGNS  AND  HOUSES  31 

First  House — The  shape  and  condition  of  the 
body,  early  environment  and  childhood's  home. 

Second  House — Finance. 

Third  House — Literature,  the  useful  arts,  practical 
intelligence,  short  journeys,  brothers  and  sisters. 

Fourth  House — The  home  and  conditions  in  old 
age. 

Fifth,  House — Amusement,  courtship,  children 
and  speculation. 

Sixth  House — Health,  servants  and  labor. 

Seventh  House — Partnership,  marriage,  the  fine 
arts  and  the  public. 

Eighth  House — Inheritance,  death. 

Ninth  House — Religion,  philanthropy,  idealism, 
justice  and  long  journeys. 

Tenth  House — Profession,  social  position  and 
ambition. 

Eleventh  House — Friends,  hopes  and  wishes. 

Twelfth  House — Prisons,  hospitals,  sorrow  and 
trouble. 


CHAPTER  IV. 

THE  RISING  SIGN  AND  THE  TWELVE  HOUSES 

TO  il'ustrate  how  a  horoscope  is  cast,  we  will  first 
cast  four  horoscopes  for  persons  born  in  Chicago, 
August  2,  1909,  at  2 :15  A.  M.,  8 :15  A.  M.,  2 :15  P.  M., 
and  8 :15  P.  M.,  as  far  as  the  placing  of  the  signs  up- 
on the  cusps  of  the  houses.  The  cusps  are  the  divid- 
ing lines  between  the  houses. 

Finding  Chicago  on  the  map,  we  note  that  it  is 
located  near  the  42nd  degree  of  North  latitude,  and 
close  to  88  degrees  of  longitude  West  from  Greenwich. 
Our  first  concern  is  to  find  the  True  Local  Time 
of  Birth.  We  first  turn  to  the  rule  on  page  22  which 
says  ' '  To  the  nearest  Standard  Meridian  Time,  add 
four  minutes  for  each  degree  the  birth  place  is  East 
of  the  Meridian  corresponding  to  that  Time. 

If  the  birth  place  is  West  of  that  Meridian,  sub- 
tract four  minutes  for  each  degree  it  is  West  thereof. 
The  nearest  Standard  Meridian  Time  is  Central 
Time  gauged  by  the  90th  meridian.  Chicago,  being 
88  degrees  West  Longitude,  is  two  degrees  East  of 
the  90th  meridian.  We  therefore  add  two  times  four, 
or  eight  minutes,  to  the  time  shown  by  the  clock,  in 
order  to  find  true  local  time.  In  the  case  of  the  first 

32 


THE  RISING  SIGN  AND  THE  TWELVE  HOUSES         33 

birth  hour,  when  the  clock  showed  2:15  A.  M.  on 
August  2nd.,  the  true  local  time  is  thus  found  to  be 
2 :23  A.  M.  This  True  Local  Time  of  Birth  will  be 
used  in  all  subsequent  calculation  of  the  horoscope- 
Note,  however,  that  this  correction  of  Standard  to 
Local  Time  applies  only  in  the  United  States,  and 
is  required  only  for  dates  subsequent  to  Nov.  18th, 
1883,  when  standard  time  was  adopted. 

We  will  now  proceed  to  find  the  sidereal  time  (ab- 
breviated to  S.  T.)  at  the  birth  place  at  the  moment 
of  birth.  As  a  starting  point  for  our  calculations  we 
have  the  S.  T.  (sidereal  time)  for  Greenwich  at  noon. 
From  that  we  may  calculate  the  sidereal  time  at  the 
birth-place  and  hour  by  the  following  rule : 

To  the  sidereal  time  for  the  noon  previous  to 
birth  (given  in  the  ephmeris)  add — 

First,  10  seconds  correction  for  every  15  degrees 
of  longitude  the  birth-place  is  west  of  Greenwich. 

Second,  the  interval  between  the  previous  noon 
and  birth. 

Third,  10  seconds  correction  for  every  hour  of 
this  interval. 

Following  the  above  rule  we  turn  to  the  page  of 
ephemeris  in  the  back  of  this  book  and  find  the  col- 
umn marked  Sidereal  Time.  As  our  first  birth  hour 
is  August  2nd,  2:23  A.  M.,  true  local  time,  we  note 
that  the  previous  noon  is  August  1st.  Opposite  that 
date  we  note  the  sidereal  time  as  being  8  hours  37 
minutes,  which  we  put  down  thus : 


34  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY  . 

H.M.   S. 

S.  T.  at  Greenwich  for  noon  previous  to  birth. . .  8  37 

Correction  for  10  seconds  for  each  15  deg.  W. 

Long,  of  birthplace 59 

Interval  between  the  previous  noon   (Aug.  1st) 

and  the  time  of  birth  (Aug.  2nd,  2:23  A.  M.)  14  23 

Correction  of  10  seconds  per  hour  of  interval  be- 
tween previous  noon  and  birth  (14  h.  23  m.) 
equals  144  seconds  or  2  min.,  24  sec 2  24 

S.  T.  at  the  birthplace  on  the  birth-hour 23    3  23 

When  the  birthplace  is  located  in  East  longitude, 

correction  for  longitude  is  subtracted.  Had  the  child 
been  born  August  2nd  at  2 :15  A.  M.,  in  latitude  42 
North,  but  in  longitude  88  East,  the  S.  T.  would  be 
figured  as  follows : 

H.M.  S. 

S.  T.  Greenwich  for  noon  (Aug.  1st) 8  37 

Correction  of  10  seconds  for  each  15  degrees 

East  Longitude   (subtracted) 59 

8  36    1 
H.M.  S. 
Interval  from  previous  noon  (Aug.  1st)  to  birth, 

Aug.  2nd,  2:23  A.  M 14  23  00 

Correction  of  10  seconds  each  hour  of  interval 

from  previous  noon  to  birth 2  24 

S.  T.  at  birthplace,  at  birth-hour 23    1  25 

As  the  Houses  are  governed  by  latitude,  the  same 

table  of  Houses  is  used  as  for  the  child  born  in  Chi- 
cago. 


THE  RISING  SIGN  AND  THE  TWELVE  HOUSES 


35 


With  this  S.  T.  we  turn  to  the  table  of  Houses 
for  the  latitude  of  the  birthplace,  42  degrees.  There 
we  search  the  various  columns  marked  Sidereal  Time 
for  our  S.  T.  at  birth:  23-3-23-  The  one  nearest  to 
that  is  23-4-46.  In  line  with  that  sidereal  time  will 
be  found  the  various  degrees  of  the  signs  to  be  placed 
in  our  horoscope. 

In  the  first  column  under  latitude  42°N.  opposite 
the  sidereal  time  23446,  we  observe  the  figure  15 ;  at 
the  top  of  the  column  we  find  the  sign  Pisces,  and 
above  that  the  figure  10,  which  means  that  the  15th 


36  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

degree  of  Pisces  is  to  be  placed  on  the  10th  cusp,  as 
done  in  the  accompanying  horoscope. 

In  the  next  column,  in  line  with  our  sidereal  time, 
we  see  the  figure  20,  at  the  top  is  the  sign  Aries,  above 
that  the  figure  11,  meaning  that  20  degrees  of  Aries 
is  to  be  placed  on  the  llth  cupp. 

In  the  third  column,  in  line  with  our  sidereal  time, 
is  the  figure  1.  Taurus  and  12  are  at  the  head  of  the 
column  but  beneath  that  is  Gemini  signifying  that  1 
degree  of  Gemini  is  to  be  placed  on  the  12th  cusp. 

The  wide  column  marked  Ascendant  comes  next. 
There  we  find  the  figures  8:10  in  line  with  our  side- 
real time,  and  the  sign  Gemini  at  the  top,  but  we  dis- 
regard that  sign  because  the  sign  Cancer  is  placed 
between  our  line  and  the  top  and  we  always  take  the 
first  sign  above  our  line.  Therefore  we  place  Cancer 
8 :10  on  the  Ascendant. 

Proceeding  along  the  figures  in  our  line  we  note 
the  figure  27  in  the  first  column  to  the  right  of  the 
wide  column.  At  the  top  is  the  sign  Cancer  again 
and  the  figure  2.  Accordingly  we  place  the  27th  de- 
gree of  Cancer  on  the  cusp  of  the  Second  House. 

In  the  extreme  right  hand  column  we  find  the  fig- 
ure 19,  the  sign  Leo  and  the  figure  3  at  the  top  of  the 
column.  Therefore  we  place  the  19th  degree  of  Leo 
on  the  Third  Cusp. 

We  have  thus  obtained  figures  for  six  of  our 
houses,  the  six  opposite  houses  are  given  the  opposite 
signs  and  degrees. 


THE  RISING  SIGN  AND  THE  TWELVE  HOUSES         37 

Having  Pisces  15  on  the  Tenth  House,  we  place 
the  opposite  degree  Virgo  15  on  the  Fourth  Cusp, 
which  is  opposite  the  Tenth. 

Aries  20  on  the  Eleventh  House  is  the  opposite  of 
Libra  20  placed  on  the  Fifth  Cu#p. 

Sagittarius  1  placed  on  the  Sixth  Cusp  forms  an 
exact  opposite  to  Gemini  1  on  the  Twelfth  House. 

The  Ascendant  is  opposite  the  Seventh  Cusp  and 
Capricorn  8 :10  placed  there  is  the  opposite  of  Cancer 
8 :10  on  the  Ascendant. 

Cancer  27  on  the  Second  House  will  be  properly 
opposed  by  Capricorn  27  on  the  Eighth  House,  and 
Aquarius  19  placed  on  the  Ninth  is  in  opposition  to 
Leo  19  on  the  Third. 

Now  all  the  cusps  are  filled,  but  on  account  of  the 
inclination  of  the  earth's  axis  some  of  the  signs  may 
be  intercepted  between  two  cusps,  therefore  it  is  nec- 
essary to  see  if  all  the  twelve  signs  are  in  our  horo- 
scope before  proceeding  further.  Counting  from 
Aries,  we  note  the  presence  of  Gemini.  Taurus  is 
missing,  and  we  therefore  place  it  in  its  proper  posi- 
tion between  Aries  and  Gemini. 

When  a  certain  sign  is  intercepted,  its  opposite 
also  will  be  missing.  We  may,  therefore,  at  once  place 
Scorpio  in  its  proper  position  between  Libra  and 
Sagittarius. 

It  will  now  be  found  that  all  the  twelve  signs  are 
placed  in  our  horoscope,  Cancer  and  Capricorn  each 
occupying  two  cusps.  It  is  finished  as  far  as  placing 


38  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

the  signs  in  their  proper  positions  relative  to  the 
houses,  and  that  is  as  far  as  we  will  proceed  at  the 
present  time,  so  we  will  leave  this  horoscope  and  cal- 
culate one  for  a  person  born  six  hours  later  in  the 
same  place:  Chicago,  August  2,  8.15  A.  M. 

We  first  have  to  find  the  True  Local  Time  of  Birth. 
As  before,  we  add  eight  minutes  to  the  time  shown 
by  the  clock,  namely  8 :15  A.  M.  This  gives  us  8 :23 
A.  M.  which  is  the  True  Local  Time  of  Birth. 

Our  rule  for  finding  the  Sidereal  Time  at  the  birth 
hour  and  place  requires  that  we  note  the — 

H.M.  S. 

S.  T.  at  Greenwich  on  the  noon  previous  to  birth 

(Aug.  1st),  as  given  in  the  Ephemeris 8  37 

Correction  of  10  seconds  for  each  15  degrees  W. 

Long,  of  birthplace  (Chicago,  88  W.) 59 

Interval  from  previous  noon  (Aug.  1st)  to  the 

time  of  birth  (Aug.  2nd,  8:23  A.  M.) 20  23 

Correction  of  10  seconds  for  each  hour  of  inter- 
val (20:23)  equals  204  seconds 3  24 

Sidereal  Time  at  birthplace  at  the  birth  hour      29    4  23 
Subtract  the  circle  of  24  hours 24 

5    4  23 

As  there  can  be  only  twenty-four  hours  in  a  day, 
we  subtract  24  where  necessary,  and  work  with  the 
remainder,  in  this  case  5-4-23  which  was  the  true 
Sidereal  Time  in  Chicago  at  the  birth.  This  time,  or 
the  nearest  thereto,  we  accordingly  seek  in  the  Table 
of  Houses  for  the  latitude  of  Chicago,  42  degrees  N. 
The  nearest  time  is  5-3-29,  and  in  line  with  that 
we  find  the  degrees  for  the  various  cusps  of  our 


THE  RISING  SIGN  AND  THE  TWELVE  HOUSES         39 

houses.  In  the  column  next  to  the  right  of  the  Si- 
dereal Time  is  the  figure  17.  At  the  top  of  the  column 
the  sign  Gemini  and  the  figure  10.  We  therefore 
place  the  17th  degree  of  Gemini  on  the  Tenth  Cusp. 

In  the  next  column  to  the  right  is  the  figure  21. 
At  the  top  of  the  column,  the  sign  Cancer  and  the 
figure  11,  so  we  place  the  21st  degree  of  Cancer  on 
the  Eleventh  Cusp. 

The  next  right  hand  column  has  the  figure  22.  At 
the  top  is  the  sign  Leo  and  the  figure  12,  so  we  place 
the  22nd  degree  of  Leo  on  the  Twelfth  House. 

The  large  column  marked  Ascendant  has  the  sign 
Virgo  and  the  figures  18:56  are  in  our  line,  so  we 
place  Virgo  18 :56  on  the  Ascendant,  or  First  House, 
of  our  figure. 

In  the  first  column  to  the  right  of  the  wide  column 
we  note  the  figure  14.  We  note  also  that  the  sign  Li- 
bra is  above  our  line  before  we  come  to  the  top  of  the 
column,  and  we  therefore  disregard  the  sign  found 
there,  but  note  the  figure  2,  which  indicates  that  the 
Second  Cusp  is  occupied  by  the  14th  degree  of  Libra. 

In  the  extreme  right  hand  column  we  find 
the  figure  13  and  also  a  sign  before  we  come  to  the  top 
of  the  column,  the  sign  Scorpio,  so  we  place  the  13th 
degree  of  Scorpio  on  the  Third  Cusp. 

Now  we  have  placed  signs  on  the  six  houses,  and 
we  proceed  to  put  in  the  six  opposite  signs  on  the  op- 
posite houses  as  before:  Opposite  Gemini  17  on  the 
Tenth  House  we  place  Sagittarius  17  on  the  Fourth 


40 


SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 


House.  Opposite  Cancer  21  on  the  Eleventh  we  place 
Capricorn  21  on  the  Fifth.  Opposite  Leo  22  on  the 
Twelfth  we  place  Aquarius  22  on  the  Sixth-  Oppo- 
site Virgo  18:56  on  the  Ascendant  we  place  Pisces 
18 :56  on  the  Seventh.  Opposite  Libra  14  on  the  Sec- 
ond place  Aries  14  on  the  Eighth,  and  opposite  Scor- 
pio 13  on  the  Third,  place  Taurus  13  on  the  Ninth 
House. 

Now  all  the  cusps  of  the  horoscope  are  filled,  and 
we  start  to  count  the  signs  to  see  if  they  are  all  pres- 
ent or  if  it  is  necessary  to  put  in  any  that  may  be  in- 


THE  RISING  SIGN  AND  THE  TWELVE  HOUSES         41 

tercepted.  We  commence  our  count  at  Aries,  and  find 
that  all  twelve  signs  are  represented,  and  it  is  there- 
fore at  a  stage  of  completion  where  we  decide  to 
leave  it  for  the  present. 

"We  next  proceed  to  cast  the  horoscope  for  a  per- 
son born  at  Chicago,  August  2,  at  2 :15  P.  M.  True 
Local  Time  of  Birth  is  8  minutes  later  or  2 :23  P.  M. 
"We  find  that  the  previous  noon  is  August  2nd  and  GO 
we  start  our  calculations  as  follows: 

H.M.  S. 
S.  T.  at  Greenwich  on  the  noon  previous  to  birth 

(Aug.  2nd)    841 

Correction  of  10  seconds  for  each  15  degrees  W. 

Long,  of  birthplace  (88  degrees) 59 

Interval  from  previous  noon  to  the  time  of  birth 

(noon  to  2:23  P.  M.) 2  23 

Correction  of  10  see's  for  each  hour  of  interval  24 

S.  T.  at  birthplace  on  birth  hour 11    5  23 

Turning  to  our  Tables  of  Houses  for  latitude 
42°N.,  we  find  the  nearest  S.  T.  to  be  11-4-46. 

In  the  first  column  under  latitude  42°N.  is  the  fig- 
ure 15;  the  sign  Virgo  and  the  figure  10  are  at  the 
top  of  the  column.  Therefore  we  place  15  degrees  of 
Virgo  on  the  Tenth  Cusp. 

The  second  column  has  the  figure  16,  Libra  and 
the  figure  11  at  the  top,  so  16  degrees  of  Libra  is 
placed  on  the  Eleventh  House. 

The  figure  10  is  in  the  third  column,  and  the  sign 
Scorpio  between  our  line  and  the  top,  therefore  we 
disregard  the  sign  at  the  top,  but  note  the  figure  12, 


42  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 


and  accordingly  place  10  degrees  of  Scorpio  on  the 
Twelfth  House. 

In  the  wide  column  we  see  the  figures  29 :16,  which 
we  place  on  the  Ascendant  with  the  sign  Scorpio 
found  at  the  head  of  the  column. 

The  column  to  the  right  of  the  wide  column  con- 
tains the  figure  1,  with  the  sign  Capricorn  above  and 
at  the  top  is  the  figure  2.  Therefore  we  put  Capri- 
corn 1  on  the  Second  Cusp. 

The  extreme  right  hand  column  shows  the  figure 
8,  the  sign  Aquarius  above  and  the  figure  3  at  the 


THE  RISING  SIGN  AND  THE  TWELVE  HOUSES         43 

head  of  the  column.    Accordingly  we  place  the  8th 
degree  of  Aquarius  on  the  Third  House. 

Now  our  six  cusps  are  filled,  and  we  proceed  to 
place  the  opposite  signs  and  degrees  on  the  other  six 
cusps  as  described  in  detail  in  connection  with  the 
first  two  horoscopes.  When  that  has  been  done  we 
count  our  signs  from  Aries  to  see  if  all  are  repre- 
sented. That  brings  out  the  fact  that  Gemini  and  Sag- 
ittarius are  missing.,  so  we  insert  them  in  their  proper 
places — Gemini  between  Taurus  and  Cancer,  Sagit- 
tarius between  Scorpio  and  Capricorn.  Our  horo- 
scope has  been  completed  as  far  as  the  signs  and 
houses  are  concerned,  therefore  we  leave  it  for  the 
present  to  cast  the  last  of  our  four  experimental  maps 
for  a  person  born  in  Chicago,  August  2,  1909,  at  8 :15 
P.  M.  True  Local  Time  of  Birth  is  8  minutes  later 
or  8:23  P.  M. 

As  before,  we  note  the — 

H.M.  S. 
S.  T.  at  Greenwich  on  the  noon  previous  to  birth 

(Aug.  2nd) 8  41 

Correction  of  10  seconds  for  every  15  degrees  the 

birthplace  is  West  of  Greenwich 59 

Interval  between  the  previous  noon  and  birth. ..  8  23 
Correction  of  10  seconds  for  every  hour  of  inter- 
val between  previous  noon  and  birth 1  24 

Sidereal  Time  at  birthplace  at  the  birth  hour      17    6  23 
With  this  sidereal  time  we  turn  to  the  tables  of 

Houses  for  the  latitude  of  birthplace,  42°N.,  and  find 
the  nearest  S.  T-  to  be  17-7-49. 


44 


SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 


In  the  first  column  under  latitude  42°  N.  we  find 
18.  At  the  top  of  the  column,  Sagittarius  and  the 
figure  10,  therefore  we  place  Sagittarius  18  on  the 
Tenth  Cusp. 

The  second  narrow  column  shows  the  figure  9. 
Capricorn  is  above  and  the  figure  11  is  at  the  top  of 
the  column,  so  we  place  Capricorn  9  on  the  Eleventh 
Cusp. 

The  third  narrow  column  has  the  figure  2  with 
Aquarius  above  and  the  figure  12  at  the  head  of  the 
column,  so  we  place  Aquarius  2  degrees  on  the  cusp 
of  the  Twelfth  House. 


THE  RISING  SIGN  AND  THE  TWELVE  HOUSES         45 

In  the  wide  column  are  the  figures  7:8,  Pisces 
above  and  Ascendant  at  the  top,  so  we  place  7:8  of 
Pisces  on  the  Ascendant. 

To  the  right  of  the  wide  column  we  find  the  figure 
25 ;  Aries  and  2  are  at  the  top,  so  we  place  Aries  25 
on  the  Second  Cusp. 

The  extreme  right  hand  column  has  the  figure  26 
and  Taurus  is  at  the  top  with  the  figure  3.  Accord- 
ingly we  place  Taurus  26  on  the  Third  Cusp. 

Having  thus  filled  the  six  cusps,  we  proceed  to 
fill  the  six  opposite  houses  with  the  opposite  signs. 

Gemini  18  on  the  Fourth  in  opposition  to  Sagit- 
tarius 18  on  the  Tenth.  Cancer  9  on  the  Fifth  in  op- 
position to  Capricorn  9  on  the  Eleventh,  and  so  on. 
When  all  the  cusps  have  been  filled  we  count  the  signs 
and  find  that  all  twelwe  are  present,  hence  our  horo- 
scope has  reached  the  same  stage  of  completion  as 
the  ones  previously  cast. 

These  horoscopes  of  four  children  born  in  the 
same  city  (Chicago)  on  the  same  day  and  year  (Aug. 
2,  1909)  but  at  different  hours,  show  graphically 
that  people  may  be,  and  are,  born  under  all  the  twelve 
signs  anywhere  on  any  day  of  the  year. 

When  we  compare  the  four  horoscopes  we  have 
cast  we  may  learn  several  important  lessons.  In  the 
first  place,  we  may  see  the  worthlessness  of  the  state- 
ments so  often  heard;  "I  was  born  under  Taurus," 
or  "I  was  born  under  Scorpio,"  which  simply  means 
that  the  person  was  born  in  May  or  November  when 


46 


SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 


the  Sun  was  in  the  signs  mentioned.  Such  a  state- 
ment at  once  exposes  the  one  who  so  expresses  him- 
self as  being  ignorant  of  the  science  of  Astrology  and 
reveals  the  fact  that  if  he  has  had  a  horoscope  cast, 
it  has  been  done  by  an  incompetent  astrologer.  These 
sometimes  advertise  to  cast  a  horoscope  "telling  your 
fortune  from  the  cradle  to  the  grave"  for  a  very 
small  sum.  But  a  conscientious  astrologer  cannot 
give  a  simple  delineation  of  character  without  spend- 


THE  RISING  SIGN  AND  THE  TWELVE  HOUSES          47 

ing  at  least  an  hour  in  calculation  and  close  concen- 
tration and  to  make  predictions  covering  a  whole 
life  would  require  days  of  arduous  work.  The  scien- 
tific astrologer  may  speak  of  a  person  as  having  Tau- 
rus or  Scorpio  rising,  and  that  statement  at  once 
shows  that  a  calculation  has  been  made  taking  into 
consideration  year,  month,  day,  hour,  and  place*  mak- 
ing the  horoscope  cast  absolutely  individual;  while 
the  other  type  of  horoscope  (?)  is  determined  solely 
from  the  month  when  a  person  was  born,  without  re- 
gard to  day,  hour  or  even  year. 

If  a  horoscope  could  be  cast  by  such  a  method  OF, 
rather,  lack  of  method,  there  would  be  only  twelve 
kinds  of  people  on  earth  and  all  persons  born  in  the 
same  month  would  have  the  same  fate.  Such  is  man- 
ifestly not  the  case;  in  fact,  there  are  no  two  people 
whose  experiences  are  exactly  alike,  and  an  Astrol- 
ogy which  does  not  make  iuch  a  distinction  cannot 
be  a  true  science. 

The  scientific  astrologer  asks  first  the  year  of  birth 
because  he  knows  that  the  planets  do  not  come  into 
the  same  relative  positions  more  than  once  in  a 
Great  Sidereal  Year ;  thus  a  child 's  horoscope  cast  for 
1909  cannot  be  duplicated  for  25,868  years.  Next 
he  asks  the  month,  for  upon  that  will  depend  the 
position  of  the  Sun,  which  is  in  a  different  sign  every 
month  in  the  year. 

The  day  determines  particularly  the  position  of 
the  Moon,  which  changes  from  one  sign  to  another 


48  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

every  two  and  one-half  days;  and  the  hour  is  also 
needful  to  fix  its  position,  as  it  Amoves  about  12  de- 
grees each  day. 

Yet  even  with  these  data  the  horoscope  would  lack 
individuality,  for  if  a  child  is  born  every  second  that 
would  mean  that  3,600  people  are  born  within  the 
same  hour.  If  we  can  bring  the  data  to  within  ten 
minutes  of  the  actual  time  of  birth  we  should  have  the 
wherewithal  to  calculate  a  relative  position  of  the 
planets  such  as  would  fit  only  600  of  the  people  on 
earth.  If  we  add  the  last  datum,  place,  which  enables 
us  to  calculate  the  rising  sign  and  degree,  we  shall 
have  an  absolutely  individual  horoscope,  for  it  is  sel- 
dom indeed  that  two  persons  are  born  in  the  same 
place,  at  the  same  hour  and  minute.  Even  twins  are 
born  at  an  interval  of  from  twenty  minutes  to  several 
hours  apart,  and  we  can  readily  see  that  a  different 
degree  would  then  be  rising  for  each  of  the  two. 
When  the  last  of  a  sign  is  rising  for  one  of  the  twins, 
the  other  will  usually  be  born  under  the  next  sign. 
As  the  rising  sign  is  one  of  the  principal  significa- 
tors  in  moulding  the  body,  the  appearance  of  the 
second  twin  might  be  totally  different  from  the  first. 
A  comparison  of  the  rising  signs  shows  an  appar- 
ent lack  of  uniformity  in  the  diurnal  motion  of  the 
earth.  At  2:15  A.  M.  Cancer  8:10  is  rising,  while 
twelve  hours  later  Scorpio  29-16  is  on  the  Asendant, 
showing  that  the  birth  place  has  travelled  only  about 
141  degrees  in  the  twelve  hours  involved.  To  com- 


THE  RISING  SIGN  AND  THE  TWELVE  HOUSES         49 

plete  the  circle,  it  must  travel  219  degrees  in  the  re- 
maining twelve  hourp.  But  as  the  diurnal  rotation 
of  the  earth  on  its  axis  is  uniform,  the  lack  of  uni- 
formity in  the  motion  noted  above  is  due  to  its  not 
being  true  diurnal  motion.  This  condition  is  caused 
by  the  obliquity  of  the  Ecliptic  and  the  consequent 
unequal  division  of  the  latter  by  the  planes  separat- 
ing the  houses,  these  planes  being  those  of  the  horizon 
and  the  meridian  and  four  intermediate  ones  at  30 
degree  intervals.  For  this  reason  certain  signs  rise 
more  slowly  than  others  and  are  therefore  called  signs 
of  Long  Ascension,  while  their  opposites  are  called 
signs  of  Short  Ascension.  It  will  be  evident  from 
the  foregoing  that  most  people  are  born  under  the 
signs  of  long  ascension, — Cancer,  Leo,  Virgo,  Libra, 
Scorpio  and  Sagittarius  in  the  Northern  Hemisphere, 
and  their  opposites  in  the  Southern  Hemisphere. 


CHAPTER  V. 

HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  POSITIONS 
OF  THE  PLANETS 

As  the  Ephemeris  is  calculated  for  Greenwich  at 
the  time  when  the  Observatory  clock  strikes  twelve, 
it  is  necessary  to  make  corrections  for  other  hours  and 
for  places  East  or  West  from  that  point  when  it  is 
desired  to  calculate  a  horoscope. 

By  adding  four  minutes  for  each  degree  of  longi- 
tude the  birthplace  is  West  of  Greenwich  to  the  true 
local  time  of  birth  we  obtain  the  Greenwich  Mean 
Time  as  recorded  by  the  Observatory  clock.  This  is 
written  G.  M.  T. 

We  will  apply  this  rule  to  calculate  the  G.  M.  T. 
of  the  horoscope  for  August  2,  8 :15  A.  M.  at  Chicago, 
which  is  88  degrees  West  longitude : 

H.M. 

True  Local  Time  of  Birth  (see  page  38)8  23  A.  M.  Aug.  2 
4  min.  times  88  degrees  equal  352  min.  5  52 

Greenwich  Mean  Time  (G.  M.  T.) . . .     2  15  P.  M.  Aug.  2 
Multiplying  the  degree  of  West  longitude  of  Chi- 
cago (88  degrees)  by  four  minutes  gives  us  352  min- 
utes, which  we  divide  by  60  because  there  are  60 

50 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS'  POSITIONS        51 

minutes  in  each  hour.  Thus  we  obtain  5  hours  52 
minutes,  which  we  add  to  the  true  local  time  of  birth, 
23  minutes  after  8  in  the  morning,  and  the  sum  is  15 
minutes  past  2  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  which  is  the 
G.  M.  T. 

That  is  to  say,  at  the  identical  time  when  the  child 
was  born  and  the  Chicago  clocks  pointed  to  15  min- 
utes after  8  o'clock  in  the  morning,  the  Observatory 
clock  at  Greenwich  showed  15  minutes  past  2  o'clock 
in  the  afternoon. 

This  latter  is  the  time  we  must  use  to  make  our 
calculations  of  the  planets'  places,  and  in  order  to 
have  as  few  factors  in  mind  as  possible  the  beginner 
is  advised  to  forget  the  local  time  of  birth  when 
once  he  has  found  the  G.  M.  T. 

In  Western  longitudes  the  G.  M.  T.  may  advance 
into  the  day  following  birth  on  account  of  the  addi- 
tion of  4  minutes  for  each  degree  of  longitude.  In 
the  cases  where  the  longitude  of  the  birthplace  is 
East  of  Greenwich  a  subtraction  of  4  minutes  is  made 
for  each  degree;  hence  the  G.  M.  T.  may  recede  into 
the  day  preceding  birth.  Therefore  we  speak  neither 
of  birthday  nor  birth  hour,  but  of  G.  M.  T.  day  and 
hour. 

Our  concern  is  now  to  find  the  motion  of  the 
planets  on  the  G.  M.  T.  day,  which  is  from  the  noon 
before  G.  M.  T.  to  the  noon  after  the  G.  M.  T  The 
positions  of  the  planets  are  found  in  the  ephemeris. 


52  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

As  our  G.  M.  T.  is  Aug.  2,  1909,  at  2 :15  P.  M., 
if  we  desire  to  calculate  the  daily  motion  of  the  Sun 
we  note  its  longitudes  on  the  noon  of  Aug.  2nd  (the 
noon  before  G.  M.  T.)  and  Aug.  3rd  (the  noon  after 
G.  M.  T.).  As  we  are  to  subtract  we  place  the  longi- 
tude of  the  planet  on  the  last  day  above,  for  that 
facilitates  the  operation. 

Deg.  Min. 
The  Sun's  longitude  at  noon  on  Aug.  3rd,  1909, 

(as  given  in  the  ephemeris) 10        28 

The  Sun's  longitude  at  noon  Aug.  2nd 9        31 

The  motion  of  the  Sun  on  the  G.  M.  T.  day 0        57 

The  next  step  is  to  find  the  interval  between  the 
G.  M.  T.  and  the  nearest  noon,  for  that  is  also  a  basis 
of  our  correction.  In  the  present  horoscope  the 
G.  M.  T.  is  Aug.  2,  2 :15  P.  M.  The  nearest  noon  la 
obviously  12  o'clock  August  2nd,  and  the  interval  be- 
tween 12  o'clock  noon  and  2:15  P.  M.  is  therefore  2 
hours  and  15  minutes. 

The  motion  of  the  planet  on  the  G.  M.  T.  day  and 
the  interval  from  G.  M.  T.  to  nearest  noon  having 
been  found,  our  problem  may  be  thus  stated : 

When  the  Sun  moves  57  minutes  of  space  in  24 
hours,  how  much  does  it  move  in  2  hours  and  15  min- 
utes ?  Answer :  5  minutes. 

This  method  of  working  the  corrections  by  simple 
proportion  may  be  used  with  advantage  where  the 
motion  of  a  planet  is  less  than  one  degree ;  with  Ve- 
nus, Mercury,  and  particularly  in  the  case  of  the 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS*  POSITIONS        53 

Moon,  it  is  much  quicker,  safer  and  more  exact  to  per- 
form the  correction  by  means  of  logarithms.  A  table 
of  logarithms  is  found  on  the  last  pages  of  our 
Ephemeris  for  any  year,  also  a  partial  table  in  the 
back  of  this  book,  and  its  use  is  exceedingly  simple. 

At  the  top  of  the  table  is  a  line  of  figures :  0  to  23. 
They  are  for  the  Hours  or  Degrees  (both  being  div- 
isible into  60  minutes) ;  on  the  left  hand  side  is  an- 
other column  having  the  minute  figures :  0  to  59. 

When  we  wish  to  find  the  logarithm  of  a  certain 
number  of  hours  and  minutes  we  simply  place  our  in- 
dex finger  upon  the  figure  corresponding  to  the  num- 
ber of  hours  or  degrees  wanted,  run  it  down  the  col- 
umn till  we  reach  the  line  corresponding  to  the  min- 
utes wanted.  At  that  point  where  the  line  of  minutes 
intersects  the  column  of  hours  or  degrees  will  be 
found  the  desired  logarithm. 

For  instance,  the  daily  motion  of  the  Sun  in  the 
horoscope  under  calculation  is  0  degrees  57  minutes. 
We  place  our  index  finger  upon  the  column  marked 
0  at  the  top.  We  run  the  finger  down  the  page  till 
we  come  in  line  with  the  figure  57  in  the  minute  col- 
umn. Where  this  line  intersects  the  column  0  is  the 
figure  1.4025,  which  is  the  logarithm  of  the  Sun's  mo- 
tion on  the  G.  M.  T.  day  from  noon  Aug.  2,  to  noon 
Aug.  3. 

In  like  manner  we  find  the  logarithm  of  interval 
between  G.  M.  T.  and  the  nearest  noon.  In  thi£  case 
the  interval  is  2  hours  15  minutes.  Running  our  index 


54  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

finger  down  the  column  marked  2  we  find  the  figure 
1.0280  in  line  with  the  figure  15  in  the  minute  column. 
That  logarithm  (1.0280)  is  the  logarithm  of  interval. 

The  daily  motion  of  each  planet  differs  from  the 
daily  motion  of  all  the  other  planets.  Therefore  the 
travel  of  each  must  be  separately  calculated  and  the 
logarithm  of  its  motion  found,  but  the  interval  be- 
tween the  G.  M.  T.  and  the  nearest  noon  applies 
equally  in  the  calculation  of  all  the  planets,  so  that 
once  the  interval  has  been  ascertained,  its  logarithm 
may  be  used  in  the  calculation  of  all  the  planets' 
places. 

Continuing  our  calculation,  we  place  the — 

Logarithm  of  the  Sun's  motion  from  noon  Aug.  2nd 

to  noon  Aug.  3rd   (57  minutes) 1,4025 

Plus  Logarithm  of  interval   1.0280 

Logarithm  of  distance  traveled  by  the  Sun  during 

the  interval  2.4305 

The  value  of  that  logarithm  in  degrees  and  min- 
utes we  ascertain  by  finding  it  or  the  logarithm  near- 
est thereto  in  the  table.  In  the  present  example  the 
nearest  logarithm  is  2.4594.  This  figure  is  in  the  col- 
umn marked  0  degrees  at  the  top,  and  in  line  with 
the  figure  5  in  the  extreme  left-hand  column  which 
contains  minutes.  Therefore  the  value  of  the  loga- 
rithm is  0  degrees  5  minutes.  Thus  we  have  obtained 
the  same  answer  to  our  problem  (When  the  Sun 
moves  57  minutes  in  24  hours,  how  much  does  it  move 
in  2  hours  15  min.  ?)  by  using  logarithms  as  we  did 
working  by  proportion.  The  latter  method  may  seem 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS'  POSITIONS        55 

easier  to  the  beginner,  but  once  the  logarithm  of  in- 
terval has  been  found  the  logarithmic  method  will  be 
found  to  be  easier,  quicker  and  more  exact,  for  the 
answers  obtained  by  the  two  methods  are  not  always 
quite  identical,  and  particularly  in  the  case  of  the 
Moon  logarithms  should  be  used. 

Having  found  the  distance  traveled  by  the  planet 
during  the  interval  between  the  G.  M.  T.  and  the 
nearest  noon,  to  find  the  place  of  the  planet  at  the 
G.  M.  T.  (which  is  the  end  and  aim  of  our  calcula- 
tions), we  must  add  this  increment  of  correction  to 
the  planet's  longitude  on  the  noon  nearest  to  the 
G.  M.  T.  day  if  the  G.  M.  T.  is  P.  M.,  for  in  that  case 
the  planet  has  traveled  farther  than  shown  by  the 
ephemeris. 

If,  on  the  other  hand,  the  G.  M.  T.  is  in  the  fore- 
noon (A.  M.)  the  planet  has  not  yet  reached  the  po- 
sition indicated  for  noon  in  the  ephemeris,  hence  it 
will  be  necessary  to  subtract  the  distance  of  travel 
for  the  interval — the  increment  of  correction — from 
the  planet's  longitude  given  in  the  ephemeris  for  the 
noon  nearest  to  the  G.  M.  T. 

In  the  present  case  the  G.  M.  T.  is  after  noon 
(P.  M.),  so  we  add: 

Deg.  Min. 
Longitude  of  the  Sun  on  the  noon  nearest  the 

G.  M.  T.,  Aug.  2nd,  as  per  ephemeris.  ..Leo    9        81 


Increment  of  correction. 


Longitude  of  the  Sun  at  G.  M.  T Leo    9        36 

This  position  will  be  entered  in  the  horoscope. 


56  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

For  the  convenience  of  the  student  we  will  now 
enunciate  the  rule  for  finding  the  planets'  places,  in 
consecutive  order  of  operation : 

First— Find  the  G.  M.  T.  by  adding  to  the  local 
time  of  birth  4  minutes  for  each  degree  of  longitude 
the  birth-place  is  west  of  Greenwich  (subtract  for 
East  longitude) . 

Second — Find  the  interval  between  the  G.  M.  T. 
and  the  nearest  noon,  also  the  logarithm  of  interval. 

Third — Find  the  planet's  motion  on  the  G.  M.  T. 
day,  from  the  noon  before  the  G.M.T.  to  the  noon  af- 
ter the  G.M.T. ;  find  also  the  logarithm  of  that  motion- 

Fourth — Add  to  the  logarithm  of  interval  the 
logarithm  of  the  planet's  motion  on  the  G.  M.  T.  day. 

The  sum  of  these  is  the  logarithm  of  the  planet's 
travel  during  the  interval. 

Fifth — Find  the  value  of  the  logarithm  of  the 
planet's  travel  during  the  interval  in  degrees  and 
minutes.  This  is  the  increment  of  correction. 

Sitith — (a)  When  the  G-M.T.  is  before  noon 
(A.M.)  subtract  the  increment  of  correction  from  the 
planet's  position  on  the  noon  nearest  to  the  G.  M.  T. 
(b)  When  the  G.  M.  T.  is  after  noon  (P.  M.)  add  the 
increment  of  correction  to  the  planet's  longitude  on 
the  noon  nearest  the  G.  M.  T. 

When  planets  are  retrograde  reverse  the  6th  rule. 

The  result  in  either  case  will  give  the  exact  posi- 
tion of  the  planet  at  G.  M.  T.,  which  is  entered  in  the 
proper  place  in  the  horoscope. 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS '  POSITIONS        57 

These  rules  have  all  been  applied  in  calculating  the 
position  of  one  planet — the  Sun — but  as  the  G.  M.  T. 
(August  2,  2:15  P.  M.)  and  the  logarithm  of  inter- 
val (1.0280)  are  the  same  for  all  the  planets  we  need 
not  calculate  them  again  as  directed  by  Sections  First 
and  Second  but  commence  our  calculations  of  the 
Moon  and  planets  according  to  Section  Three : 

Deg.  Min. 
Longitude  of  the  Moon  on  the  noon  after  G.M.T. 

as  per  the  ephemeris  (Aug.  3) Pisces  2  39 

Longitude  of  the  Moon  on  the  noon  before  G.M.T. 

as  per  the  ephemeris  Aug.  2) Aquarius  17        55 


The  Moon's  motion  on  the  G.M.T.  day 14        44 

The  student  will  remember  that  there  are  30  de- 
grees in  each  sign  and  60  minutes  in  one  degree.  In 
the  foregoing  subtraction  it  was  necessary  to  borrow 
1  degree  and  add  its  60  minutes  to  39,  for  only  then 
could  we  subtract  from  the  total  of  99  minutes  the  55 
minutes  as  required,  leaving  a  remainder  of  44  min- 
utes. Similarly,  we  borrow  one  sign  (30  degrees), 
adding  it  to  the  one  degree  of  Pisces  left  after  we  bor- 
rowed the  one  degree  to  work  our  subtraction  of  the 
minutes.  Thus  we  subtract  17  from  31  degrees,  which 
leaves  a  remainder  of  14  degrees. 

According  to  Section  Four  of  our  rule  we  add — 

Logarithm  of  the  Moon's  motion  on  G.M.T.  day. . .     .2119 
Logarithm  of  interval 1.0280 


Logarithm  of  Moon's  travel  in  interval 1.2399 


58  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Section  Five  directs  us  to  find  the  value  of  this 
logarithm,  and  in  our  table  of  logarithms  we  note  as 
the  nearest  thereto  the  figure  1.2393.  Above  that,  we 
see  at  the  head  of  the  column  the  figure  1 ;  to  the  ex- 
treme left  is  the  figure  23,  indicating  that  the  Moon 
has  traveled  1  degree  23  minutes  during  the  interval 
(between  G.  M.  T.  and  the  nearest  noon).  This  is 
therefore  the  increment  of  correction. 

Section  Six  (b)  directs  that  we  add  the  increment 
of  correction  to  the — 

Deg.  Min. 

Longitude  of  the  Moon  on  the  noon  nearest 

G.M.T.   (Aug.  2) Aquarius  17        55 

Increment  of   correction    .  1        23 


The  longitude   of  the  Moon   in  the  horoscope 

Aquarius  19        18 

The  motion  of  Neptune,  Uranus,  Saturn  and  Jup- 
iter on  the  G.  M.  T.  day  from  noon  August  2nd  to 
noon  August  3rd  is  seen  by  a  glance  at  the  ephemeris 
to  have  been  only  a  few  minutes.  Consequently  the 
distance  they  have  traveled  in  the  interval  is  negli- 
gible and  they  may  be  entered  in  the  horoscope  as 
having  the  longitude  of  the  nearest  noon  to  the  G.  M. 
T.,  August  2nd.  Mars  has  moved  15  minutes  on  the 
G.  M.  T.  day,  and  we  may  therefore  add  1  minute  for 
his  travel  during  the  interval  to  his  longitude  August 
2nd  as  given  in  the  ephemeris;  so  that  we  enter  him 
in  the  horoscope  as  being  in  Aries  3  ;58. 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS*  POSITIONS        59 

Venus  will  need  logarithmic  correction. 

Deg.  Min. 
Longitude  of  Venus  on  the  noon  after  G.M.T. 

(Aug.  3)  Virgo  6  21 

Longitude  of  Venus  on  the  noon  before  G.M.T. 

(Aug.  2)    Virgo    5          9 


Venus'  motion  on  the  G.M.T.  day 1        12 

Logarithm  of  Venus'  motion  on  G.M.T.  day 1.3010 

Logarithm  of  interval    1.0280 

Logarithm  of  Venus'  travel  during  interval 2.3290 

Increment  of  correction  (value  of  log.  2.3290  or  the  near' 
est  thereto,  in  this  case  2.3133)  equal  0  degrees  7  min. 

Deg.  Min. 
Venus'  longitude  on  the  noon  nearest  G.M.T. 

(Aug.  2nd)   Virgo  5          9 

Increment   of  correction    7 


Venus'  long,  to  be  entered  in  horoscope. .  .Virgo    5        16 
Mercury  also  has  moved  sufficiently  to  make  it  de- 
sirable to  calculate  his  exact  longitude  at  G.  M.  T.  of 
birth  by  logarithms — 

Deg.  Min. 
Longitude  of  Mercury  on  the  noon  after  G.M.T. 

Leo    9        22 

Longitude  of  Mercury  on  noon  before  G.  M.  T. 

.  Leo    7        17 


Mercury's  motion  on  the  G.M.T.  day 2          5 

Logarithm  of  Mercury's  motion  on  G.M.T.  day. . . .  1.0614 
Logarithm  of  interval   1.0280 

Logarithm  of  Mercury's  travel  during  interval. ..  .2.0894 
Value  of  log.  2.0894,  or  increment  of  correction, 
0  degrees,  12  minutes. 


60  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Deg.  Min. 
Longitude  of  Mercury  on  noon  nearest  G.M.T. 

Leo    7        17 

Increment  of  correction    0        12 


Mercury's  long,  to  be  entered  in  horoscope.  .Leo  7  29 
The  position  of  the  Dragon's  Head,  ( &)  or 
Moon's  Node,  and  the  Dragon's  Tail,  (O)  have  now 
to  be  found.  The  longitude  of  the  Dragon's  Head 
for  Aug.  2nd.,  the  noon  nearest  to  the  G.  M.  T.,  is 
found  in  the  ephemeris  to  be  13.  47  Gemini.  The 
Dragon's  Tail  occupies  the  opposite  point,  namely 
13.  47  Sagittarius.  These  points  are  to  be  entered  in 
the  horoscope. 

There  remains  yet  another  factor  to  complete  the 
horoscope :  the  Part  of  Fortune.  This  is  an  imaginary 
point  calculated  from  the  longitude  of  the  Sun,  Moon 
and  Ascendant.  The  philosophy  is,  that  the  human 
body  is  produced  by  the  lunar  forces.  At  the  time 
of  conception  the  Moon  may  be  mathematically  dem- 
onstrated to  have  been  in  the  degree  which  is  the  As- 
cendant at  birth — at  birth  it  has  a  different  longitude. 
In  one  of  these  positions  the  Moon  may  be  said  to 
have  magnetized  the  positive  pole,  in  the  other  the 
negative  pole  of  the  seed  atom  which  as  a  magnet 
draws  to  itself  the  chemical  substance  that  builds  the 
dense  body.  The  solar  forces  vitalize  the  body  and, 
as  it  is  constantly  decaying,  a  pabulum  is  necessary  to 
repair  waste.  That  nutriment  and  all  material  pos- 
sessions, are  therefore,  astrologically  speaking,  de- 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS*  POSITIONS        61 

rived  through  the  combined  influences  of  the  Sun  and 
the  before-mentioned  two  positions  of  the  Moon. 
When  the  planetary  aspects  to  this  Part  of  Fortune 
are  favorable  material  success  and  prosperity  follow. 
When  adverse  influences  center  upon  it,  reverses  are 
met.  The  nature  of  the  aspecting  planet,  the  sign 
and  house  it  is  in  tell  the  sources  whence  we  may  ex- 
pect one  or  the  other,  and  thus  show  us  where  to  di- 
rect our  energies  or  what  to  avoid. 

The  Signs  of  the  Zodiac  are  counted  from  Arbs 
which  is  the  first  sign,  and  each  is  thus  numbered — 

Aries   1  Libra    7 

Taurus    2  Scorpio    8 

Gemini    3  Sagittarius    9 

Cancer    4  Capricorn    10 

Leo    5  Aquarius    11 

Virgo  6  Pisces   12 

To  find  the  Part  of  Fortune : 

Add  to  the  longitude  of  the  Ascendant:  sign,  de- 
gree and  minute,  the  longitude  of  the  Moon :  sign,  de- 
gree and  minute : 

From  that  sum  subtract  the  longitude  of  the  Sun : 
sign,  degree  and  minute : 

The  remainder  is  the  longitude :  sign,  degree  and 
minute  of  the  Part  of  Fortune. 

Applying  this  rule  to  the  horoscope  we  are  calcu- 
lating, we  note  the  factors  involved  in  the  calculation 
as  follows : 


62  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Deg.  Min. 
Longitude  of  the  Ascendant.  .Virgo  (6th  Sign)   18        56 

Longitude  of  the  Sun Leo  (5th  Sign)       9        36 

Longitude  of  the  Moon.  .Aquarius  (llth  Sign)  19        18 

We  then  follow  the  rule  and  add — 

Sign    Deg.  Min. 

Longitude  of  the  Moon   11        19        18 

Longitude  of  the  Ascendant 6        18        56 


18         8        14 
Subtract — 
Longitude  of  the  Sun 5          9        36 


Longitude  of  the  Part  of  Fortune 12        28        38 

The  twelfth  sign  is  Pisces,  hence  the  longitude  of 
the  Part  of  Fortune  in  the  horoscope  will  be  Pisces 
28 :38. 

In  the  above  example  the  student  will  notice  that 
when  adding  the  degrees  of  the  Moon  and  Ascendant : 
19  -f- 18  -]- the  1  degree  carried  in  addition  of  the  min- 
utes equals  38,  but  there  are  only  30  degrees  in  a  sign, 
so  one  sign  was  carried  forward  and  added  to  the 
other  signs,  the  same  as  we  add  60  minutes  to  degrees 
or  hours. 

If,  after  subtracting  the  longitude  of  the  Sun 
there  are  more  than  12  signs  left,  we  subtract  the  cir- 
cle of  12  and  work  with  the  remainder. 

It  also  happens  that  the  signs  of  the  Sun's  longi- 
tude exceed  the  combined  longitudes  of  the  Moon  and 
Ascendant,  so  that  it  is  impossible  to  perform  the  sub- 
traction. For  instance,  if  the — 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS*  POSITIONS        63 

Sign   Deg.  Mm. 

Longitude  of  Ascendant Aries      1        25        55 

Longitude  of  the  Moon Aries      1        25        50 


3        21        45 

If  the  Sun  is  in  Capricorn,  the  10th 
sign,  we  cannot  subtract  10  from  3  so  we 
Add  the  circle  of  12  signs 12        00        00 


15        21        45 
Then  we  may  subtract-— 
Longitude  of  the  Sun 10        29        55 


4        21        50 
Longitude  of  Part  of  Fortune  ..Cancer  21        50 

In  the  foregoing  subtraction  of  55  minutes  from 
45  we  borrowed  1  degree,  60  minutes,  added  that  to 
the  45  minutes,  and  from  their  sum,  105  minutes,  we 
subtracted  55,  leaving  50  minutes. 

To  subtract  29  degrees  from  20  left  after  borrow- 
ing 1  degree  for  subtracting  the  minutes,  is  impos- 
sible, so  we  borrow  one  sign  from  the  15.  That  30  de- 
grees we  add  to  the  20,  which  makes  50.  From  that 
50  degrees  we  subtract  29,  leaving  21  degrees.  Of 
the  15  signs  ,we  have  borrowed  1,  leaving  14,  and  10 
from  14  leaves  4.  The  fourth  sign  is  Cancer,  so  the 
longitude  of  the  Part  of  Fortune  is  Cancer  21 :50. 

We  will  now  make  a  list  of  the  longitudes  of  the 
planets  as  we  have  figured  them,  prior  to  placing 
them  in  the  horoscope : 

5 


64  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Deg.      Min. 

Longitude  of  the  Sun   Leo  9  36 

Longitude  of  the  Moon  Aquarius  19  18 

Long,  of  Neptune   (noon  Aug.  2,) ...  .Cancer  17  42 

Long,  of  Uranus   (noon  Aug.  2,) .  .Capricorn  18  15R 

Long,  of  Saturn   (noon  Aug.  2,) Aries  23  13 

Long,  of  Jupiter   (noon  Aug.  2,) Virgo  15  10 

Longitude  of  Mars    Aries  3  58 

Longitude  of  Venus   Virgo  5  16 

Longitude  of  Mercury   Leo  7  29 

Longitude  of  Part  of  Fortune Pisces  28  38 

Longitude   of   Dragon's   Head Gemini  13  47 

Longitude   of   Dragon's   Tail Sagittarius  13  47 

The  planets  may  now  be  placed  in  the  horoscope. 

In  placing  the  planets  the  student  should  have 
particular  regard  to  two  points : 

First — That  the  planets  are  placed  in  their  proper 
houses  and  order.  The  signs  and  degrees  of  the  zod- 
iac go  in  the  direction  shown  by  the  arrows;  conse- 
quently, starting  from  Aries  0  (which  must  be  in  the 
Seventh  House,  as  Aries  14  is  on  the  cusp  of  the 
Eighth  House)  we  note  that  Mars  is  in  Aries  3 :58 ; 
consequently  we  place  him  in  the  Seventh  House 
close  to  the  cusp  of  the  Eighth-  As  Aries  14  is  on  the 
cusp  or  line  which  marks  the  entrance  to  the  Eighth 
House,  and  Saturn  is  Aries  23 :13,  we  place  him  in  the 
Eighth  House  just  above  the  cusp.  Thus  both  planets 
are  in  their  proper  relation  to  one  another  and  to  the 
houses,  and  they  are  so  placed  that  in  reading  we  can 
make  no  mistake  as  to  the  sign  they  are  in.  If  Marsi 
had  been  placed  lower  down  in  the  Seventh  House, 
at  a  cursory  glance  he  might  seem  to  be  in  Pisces,  and 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS'  POSITIONS        65 


Saturn,  placed  further  up  in  the  Eighth,  might  ap- 
pear to  be  in  Taurus.  That  would  cause  an  error  in 
reading  which  a  little  care  will  obviate.  If  the  stu- 
dent observes  carefully  the  method  used  in  placing 
the  planets  in  this  horoscope  there  will  never  be  any 
doubt  as  to  the  signs  the  planets  are  occupying. 

Second — The  positions  of  the  planets  should  be 
readable  without  the  necessity  of  turning  and  twist- 
ing the  horoscope,  which  is  subversive  of  proper  con- 
centration. If  planets  in  the  Third,  Fourth,  Ninth 
and  Tenth  Houses  are  written  as  we  have  inscribed 


66  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Neptune  and  Uranus,  this  inconvenience  will  be  over 
come. 

The  horoscope  has  now  been  cast  and  is  complete. 
Most  astrologers  now  start  to  read,  but  to  do  this 
work  thoroughly  it  is  necessary  to  make  an  index 
such  as  will  be  found  in  a  later  chapter.  In  order  to 
make  the  student  thoroughly  conversant  with  the 
manner  of  casting  a  horoscope  we  will  first  complete 
the  figure  cast  in  part  for  August  2,  8 :15  P.  M.,  for 
that  horoscope  offers  certain  peculiarities  worthy  of 
illustration. 

To  find  the  G.  M.  T.  we  add  to  the  True  Local 

Time  of  Birth,  Aug.  2, 8    23  P.  M. 

4  min.  for  each  of  the  88  degrees  longi- 
tude, birthplace  is  west  of  Greenwich  ....      5    52 


G.  M.  T.,  August  3rd 2    15  A.  M. 

Here  is  an  important  point.  When  we  add  5  hours 
and  52  minutes  to  8  P.  M.,  we  bring  the  G.  M.  T.  into 
the  following  day;  at  the  identical  time  when  the 
child  was  born  and  the  Chicago  clocks  pointed  to  15 
minutes  past  8  on  the  evening  of  August  2nd,  the  Ob- 
servatory clock  at  Greenwich  showed  15  minutes  past 
2  on  the  morning  of  August  3rd.  Thus  the  noon  of 
August  3rd  is  nearest  the  G.  M.  T.,  and  the  interval 
between  G.  M.  T.  (2:15  A.  M.)  and  nearest  noon  is 
therefore  9  hours,  45  minutes,  the  logarithm  of  inter- 
val being  .3912. 

We  have  now  performed  the  operations  prescribed 
in  Sections  One  and  Two  of  our  rule  and  we  will  next 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS*  POSITIONS        67 

find  the  motion  of  the  Sun  on  the  G.  M.  T.  day  as  di- 
rected by  Section  Three : 

Deg.  Mitt. 
Long,  of  Sun  on  noon  after  G.  M.  T. 

(Aug.  3,)    Leo     10        28 

Long,  of  Sun  on  noon  before  G.  M.  T. 

(Aug.  2,)    Leo      9        31 


Sun's  motion  on  the  G.  M.  T.  day 57 

Log.  of  Sun's  motion  on  G.  M.  T.  day 1.4025 

Logarithm  of  interval    3912 


Log.  of  Sun's  travel  during  interval 1.7937 

Deg.  Min. 

Value  of  logarithm  1.7937  (increment 
of  correction)  0  degrees,  23  minute.. 

Long,  of  Sun  on  noon  nearest  G.  M.  T Leo    10        28 

Minus  increment  of  correction 0        23 


Long,  of  Sun  at  G.  M.  T Leo    10          5 

This  position  may  be  entered  in  the  horoscope. 

In  the  last  horoscope  we  added  the  increment  of 
correction  to  the  longitude  of  each  planet  because  the 
G.  M.  T.  was  after  noon.  Here  the  G.  M.  T.  is  before 
noon  hence  we  subtract  the  increment  of  correction 
from  the  longitude  of  each  planet  on  the  nearest  noon 
to  G.  M.  T.  as  directed  by  the  rule  Section  Six  (b). 

Deg.  Min. 

Long,  of  Moon  on  noon  after  G.  M.  T.  .  .Pisces      2        39 
Long,  of  Moon  on  noon  before  G.  M.  T. 
Aquarius     17        55 


Motion  of  Moon  on  G.  M.  T.  day 14        44 


68  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Logarithm  of  Moon's  motion  2119 

Logarithm   of  interval    3912 

Log.  of  Moon's  motion  during  interval 6031 

Deg.  Min. 

Value  of  logarithm  .6031  (increment 

of  correction)  5  degrees,  59  minutes. 
Long,  of  Moon  on  noon  nearest  G.  M.  T. 

(Aug.  3,) Pisces       2        39 

Minus  increment  of  correction  .  5        59 


Longitude  of  Moon  at  G.  M.  T Aquarius    26        40 

As  in  the  first  horoscope  we  calculated,  so  in  this 
we  may  pass  Neptune,  Uranus,  and  Saturn  with- 
out correcting,  and  enter  the  longitude  of  each 
for  the  noon  nearest  G.  M.  T.  in  the  horoscope.  Mars' 
motion  is  15  minutes  on  the  G.  M.  T.  day  and  his 
motion  during  the  interval  of  9  hours,  45  minutes 
would  therefore  be  about  6  minutes.  Subtracting  6 
minutes  from  Mars'  longtitude  en  Aug.  3rd  (the 
noon  nearest  G.  M.  T.),  Mars'  position  in  the  horos- 
cope will  be  Aries  4:06.  Similarly  Jupiter  requires 
a  correction  of  4  minutes  making  his  position  Virgo 
15.17. 

Longitude  of  Venus  on  noon  after  G.  M.  T. 

(Aug.  3)    Virgo      6        21 

Longitude  of  Venus  on  noon  before  G.  M.  T. 

(Aug.  2)    Virgo      5          9 


Motion  of  Venus  on  G.  M.  T.  day 1        12 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS*  POSITIONS        69 

Logarithm  of  Venus'  motion  on  G.  M.  T. 

day 1.3010 

Logarithm   of  interval    3912 


Logarithm  of  Venus'  travel  during  interval 1.6922 

Deg.  Min. 
Value  of  logarithm  1.6922  (increment 

of  correction)  0  degrees,  29  minutes. 
Long,  of  Venus  on  noon  nearest  G.  M.  T. 

Virgo      6        21 

Minus  increment  of  correction 0        29 


Long,  of  Venus  to  be  entered  in  horoscope .... 

Virgo      5        52 

Mercury  is  the  last  of  the  planets  we  have  to 
calculate. 

Deg.  Min. 
Longitude  of  Mercury  on  noon  after  G.  M.  T. 

(Aug.   3.)     Leo      9        22 

Longitude  of  Mercury  on  noon  before  G.  M.  T. 

(Aug.   2.)    Leo      7        17 

Motion  of  Mercury  on  G.  M.  T.  day 2          5 

Log.  of  Mercury's  travel  on  G.  M.  T.  day 1.0614 

Logarithm   of  interval    3912 

Log.  of  Mercury's  motion  during  interval 1.4526 

DegMin. 

Value  of  logarithm  1.4526  (increment 

of  correction)   0  degrees,  51  minutes. 
Longitude  of  Mercury  on  noon  nearest  G.  M.  T. 

(Aug.    3)     Leo      9 

Minus  increment  of  correction 0        51 


Longitude  of  Mercury  to  be  entered  in  horo- 


scope 


Leo      8        31 


70  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

The  position  of  the  Dragon's  Head  (&)  or 
Moon's  Node,  and  the  Dragon's  Tail  (?5),  have  also 
to  be  found.  The  Dragon's  Head  for  Aug.  3rd.,  the 
noon  nearest  the  G.  M.  T.,  is  found  in  the  ephemeris 
to  be  in  13.  44  Gemini.  The  Dragon's  Tail  occupies 
the  opposite  point  of  13.  44  Sagittarius. 

It  now  remains  to  calculate  the  Part  of  Fortune, 
and  we  note  the  factors  in  that  problem  as  being: 

Deg.  Min. 

Ascendant,  the  12th  sign  Pisces      7          8 

Longitude  of  Sun,  the  5th  sign Leo    10          5 

Longitude  of  Moon,  the  llth  sign. .  .Aquarius    26        40 

We  proceed  according  to  the  rule  given : 

Sign    Deg.  Min. 

Longitude  of  Ascendant    12          7          8 

Longitude  of  Moon    11        26        40 


24          3        48 
Minus: 
Longitude  of  Sun   5        10          5 


18        23        43 
Subtract  the  circle  of  12  signs 12 


6        23        43 
Longitude  of  the  Part  of  Fortune 

Virgo  23        43 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS'  POSITIONS       71 


We  will  now  make  a  list  of  the  planets  as  corrected 
for  insertion  in  the  horoscope: 

Deg.  Min. 

The   Sun    Leo 

The  Moon   Aquarius 

Neptune    Cancer 

Uranus Capricorn 

Saturn Aries 

Jupiter Virgo 

Mars Aries 


Venus  

Mercury 

Part  of  Fortune  .  .  . 
Dragon's  Head  .  .  . 
Dragon's  Tail  .... 


, Virgo 

, Leo 

Virgo 

Gemini 

.  Sagittarius 


10 
26 
17 
18 
23 
15 
4 
5 
8 
23 
13 
13 


5 

40 
44 
13R 
14 
17 

6 
52 
31 
43 
44 
44 


72  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

We  have  now  cast  the  two  horoscopes  and  a  com- 
parison reveals  the  fact  that  although  cast  for  persons 
born  in  the  same  city  on  the  same  day  of  the  year,  the 
characteristics  of  one  of  these  persons  will  be  entirely 
opposite  to  those  of  the  other,  and  as  character  is  the 
determinator  of  destiny,  the  lives  of  these  two  per- 
sons will  be  entirely  opposite. 

Before  we  can  judge  these  two  horoscopes  it  is 
necessary  that  we  should  obtain  a  clear  conception  of 
the  relations  of  the  planets  to  one  another,  to  the 
signs  of  the  Zodiac  and  to  the  houses  as  they  are  in 
each  of  the  two  horoscopes,  and  to  that  end  we  will 
make  an  index  that  shall  reveal  these  relationships 
at  a  glance,  so  that  our  minds  may  not  be  hampered 
by  mathematics  at  the  time  when  we  are  judging  the 
horoscope,  but  be  free  and  concentrated  upon  the 
meaning  of  the  different  aspects  and  positions. 

RETROGRADATION 

On  the  page  of  our  ephemeris  copied  in  this  book, 
you  will  find  in  the  columns  of  Saturn  and  Mars  a 
capital  R.  The  meaning  is  as  follows : 

The  planets  in  our  solar  system  move  in  one  direc- 
tion, from  west  to  east,  but  their  orbits  about  the  Sun 
are  of  varying  sizes,  and  so  are  their  velocities.  The 
earth  travels  65,000  miles  an  hour  and  still  its  circle 
is  so  large  that  it  requires  365  days  to  journey  around 
the  Sun.  Mercury  makes  a  much  smaller  circle 
around  the  Sun,  and  travels  104,000  miles  an  hour,  so 


HOW  TO  CALCULATE  THE  PLANETS'  POSITIONS        73 

it  completes  a  revolution  around  the  Sun  in  88  days. 
Uranus  travels  only  15000  miles  an  hour,  but  its  cir- 
cle is  so  large  that  it  requires  84  years  to  complete. 
The  other  planets  show  similar  variations  of  speed. 
If  they  traveled  in  a  straight  line  the  smaller  and 
faster  planets  would  soon  leave  the  more  ponderous 
and  slow-moving  behind,  but  as  they  move  in  circles, 
they  pass  a  given  point  of  observation  again  and 
again.  Were  that  point  central  and  stationary  this 
constant  forward  motion  of  the  planets  in  their  re- 
spective orbits  would  be  apparent  to  all  observers; 
but  that  is  the  trouble,  there  is  no  stationary  point; 
every  particle,  from  Jupiter,  the  giant  of  our  solar 
system,  to  the  smallest  particle  of  ''Stardust"  is  in 
incessant  motion  around  a  common  center,  and  there- 
fore, at  times  one  planet  moves  almost  transversely  to 
the  path  of  another  moving  body  and  it  appears  for  a 
time  as  if  it  stood  still  in  its  orbit.  Astronomers  s  / 
that  such  a  planet  is  Stationary.  At  other  times  this 
oblique  motion  of  the  planets  relative  to  the  earth's  po. 
sition  in  its  orbit  makes  them  seem  to  move  backward 
in  the  zodiac,  and  this  we  call  Retrograde.  In  the 
ephemeris  we  find  a  capital  R  in  line  with  the  day 
when  any  planet  commences  thus  seemingly  to  recede, 
and  this  retrogradation  goes  on  until  we  find  a  cap- 
ital D  which  indicates  that  a  direct  forward  motion 
of  the  planet  is  again  observable. 

Though  this  backward  motion  of  a  planet  is  only 
seeming,  it  has  a  very  real  effect  in  respect  to  the  in- 


74  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

fluence  which  a  planet  exerts,  for  it  is  the  angle  of 
the  ray  which  determines  the  influence  of  a  planet. 
The  planets  are  foci  which  transmit  and  intensify  the 
properties  of  fixed  stars  so  that  they  affect  us  in  a 
much  greater  degree  than  when  not  focussed  upon 
the  point  of  observation — the  birthplace. 

Let  us  now  suppose  that  at  the  time  a  child  is  born 
we  look  at  Saturn  and  beyond  him,  right  along  our 
line  of  observation,  we  see  the  fixed  star  Antares 
which  is  in  about  8  degrees  of  Sagittarius;  the  child 
is  then  getting  a  tendency  to  eye  trouble  which  is  suf- 
ficiently severe  even  if  the  planet  is  traveling  "di- 
rect" in  its  orbit  as  is  generally  the  case,  for  then  An- 
tares gradually  goes  out  of  focus,  and  Saturn  will 
not  return  to  the  conjunction  until  it  has  completed 
its  circle  journey  around  the  Sun  (which  takes  about 
29  years) .  If,  on  the  other  hand,  we  find  that  on  the 
day  after  birth  Saturn  has  retrograded  somewhat, 
and  still  more  the  next  day,  and  so  on  for  a  week  or 
two,  then  that  also  brings  Antares  out  of  focus,  but 
there  is  this  important  difference,  that  instead  of  tak- 
ing 29  years  to  form  the  next  conjunction  Saturn 
may  become  "direct,"  and  form  the  second  con- 
junction with  Antares  in  a  few  weeks  after  birth,  and 
this  repeated  evil  ray  may  aggravate  the  natal  defect 
to  such  an  extent  that  the  child  becomes  blind.  Thus 
we  reiterate,  that  while  the  retrograde  motion  of  a 
planet  is  only  seeming,  its  influence  on  human  affairs 
is  very  real. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

THE  ASPECTS 

The  circle  of  the  zodiac,  like  any  other  circle,  is 
divisible  into  360  degrees.  Within  this  circle  move 
the  heavenly  bodies  of  our  solar  system,  but  their  mo- 
tion is  far  from  uniform,  as  shown  in  the  first  chap- 
ter. Therefore  those  planets  which  move  the  slowest 
are  overtaken,  passed,  and  re-passed  by  the  swifter 
bodies. 

When  one  planet  is  a  certain  number  of  degrees 
from  another  planet  they  are  said  to  be  in  aspect. 

TABLE  OP  ASPECTS 

The  Opposition planets  are  180  degrees  apart. 

The  Square "         "      90      " 

The  Sextile "         "      60      " 

The  Trine "         "    120      "  " 

The  Conjunction..     "        "       0      "          " 

The  Parallel  occurs  when  two  planets  have  the 
same  degree  of  declination,  no  matter  whether  one  is 
north  and  the  other  south  of  the  equator.  This  will 
be  made  clear  in  calculations  which  follow  later. 

75 


76  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Of  the  aspects  mentioned  above,  the  Opposition 
and  Square  are  said  to  be  evil ;  the  Sextile  and  Trine 
are  designated  good,  while  the  Conjunction  and  Par- 
allel are  classed  as  indeterminate;  if  they  occur  be- 
tween so-called  good  planets  they  bring  good;  if  be- 
tween the  evil  planets  (so-called)  they  bring  evil.  A 
horoscope  is  considered  fortunate  or  the  reverse  ac- 
cording to  whether  the  sextiles  and  trines  are  more 
numerous  than  the  squares  and  oppositions. 

Such  a  viewpoint  is  erroneous.  In  the  Father's 
Kingdom  there  is  no  evil.  What  appears  so  is  only 
good  in  the  making.  When  a  lapidary  is  cutting  a 
precious  stone  he  applies  part  after  part  of  the  rough 
gem  to  the  grindstone  and  at  each  application  we  may 
hear  the  loud  screeching,  as  if  in  pain,  from  the  stone. 
By  degrees,  however,  as  a  consequence  of  the  harsh 
grinding  process,  it  will  acquire  a  beautifully  pol- 
ished surface  with  numerous  facets  capable  of  receiv- 
ing, reflecting  and  refracting  the  brilliant  sunlight. 

God  and  His  Ministers,  the  Seven  Planetary  Spir- 
its, are  the  Lapidaries  and  man  is  a  diamond  in  the 
rough.  To  polish  and  uncover  his  spiritual  nature 
varied  experiences  are  necessary.  They  may  be  pleas- 
ant or  otherwise,  as  indicated  by  what  are  commonly 
called  good  or  bad  aspects ;  but  it  is  safe  to  say  that 
the  adverse  experiences  which  come  to  us  under  so- 
called  bad  aspects  are  as  potent  developers  of  spirit- 
ual muscle — removing  more  of  our  selfishness,  serving 
to  make  us  more  tolerant  and  sympathetic,  as  the 


THE  ASPECTS  77 

harsh  grinding  which  serves  to  remove  the  rough  coat 
of  the  diamond.  Though  a  horoscope  full  of  squares 
and  oppositions  may  indicate  what  is  ordinarily 
termed  a  hard  life,  such  a  one  is  infinitely  preferable 
(from  a  spiritual  standpoint)  to  a  nativity  with  only 
"good"  aspects,  for  that  could  give  but  an  insipid 
existence,  while  a  "bad"  horoscope  will  give  action 
and  zest  to  the  life  in  one  direction  or  another. 

Moreover  as  the  stars  do  not  compel,  but  give  ten- 
dencies only,  it  lies  with  us  in  a  large  measure  to  as- 
sert our  individuality  and  transmute  present  evil  to 
future  good.  Thus  we  shall  work  in  harmony  with 
the  stars  and  rule  them  by  obedience  to  cosmic  law. 

The  influence  of  an  aspect  between  the  planets  at 
birth  is  felt  even  if  they  are  not  exactly  60,  90,  120  or 
180  degrees  apart;  an  "orb,"  so-called,  of  6  degrees 
is  allowed. 

In  the  accompanying  cut  Saturn  and  Jupiter  are 
within  orb  of  each  other  because  one  is  1  degree,  the 
other  7  degrees  of  Aries.  Saturn  being  1  degree,  is 
also  within  orb  of  Mars  (3  degrees)  and  Mercury  (5 
degrees) ,  but  is  not  within  orb  of  the  Sun,  Moon  or 
Venus,  as  there  are  more  than  6  degrees  from  1  (Sat- 
urn's degree)  to  9,  12  and  14,  the  degrees  occupied  by 
the  Sun,  Moon  and  Venus. 

The  spiritual  reason  for  this  orb  is  as  follows: — 
Besides  the  visible  body  of  man  which  we  perceive  by 
our  senses,  man  has  also  invisible  vehicles  called  by 
Paul  spiritual  bodies,  and  man  himself  is  a  spirit. 


78 


SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 


When  we  have  developed  the  faculty  of  spiritual 
sight,  which  is  latent  in  all,  we  shall  see  these  finer 
bodies  protruding  far  beyond  the  dense  body  which 
is  located  in  the  center  of  this  "aura,"  much  as  the 
yolk  of  an  egg  is  in  the  center  of  the  egg,  surrounded 
by  the  white  on  all  sides. 

Before  two  human  beings  come  in  close  physical 
contact  their  auras  have  mingled;  that  is  the  reason 
why  we  "feel  the  presence  of  another"  at  times  be- 
fore we  become  aware  of  him  by  means  of  our  ordi- 
nary senses. 


THE  ASPECTS 


79 


As  above,  so  below.  Man  is  made  in  the  image  of 
God  and  of  His  ministers — the  star-angels.  Each 
planet  has  an  invisible  world  protruding  into  space 
beyond  the  dense  visible  sphere  perceived  by  the  eye. 
"When  these  planetary  auras  come  into  aspect  an  in- 
fluence is  felt,  though  the  visible  planets  may  yet  lack 
6  degrees  in  forming  an  aspect  or  they  may  have  gone 
6  degrees  past  the  aspect  before  the  influence  ceases. 

In  order  to  determine  at  a  glance  just  what  aspect 
the  planets  in  a  horoscope  have  to  one  another,  when 
within  orbs  we  note  the  following  division  of  the  zod- 
iacal signs : 


CARDINAL 
SIGNS 


FIXED 
SIGNS 


COMMON 
SIGNS 


Planets  in  Cardinal  signs  are  in  conjunction, 
square  or  opposition  if  within  orb,  planets  in  Fixed 
signs  are  also  in  conjunction,  square  or  opposition  if 
within  orbs  and  so  are  planets  in  Common  signs.  A 
glance  at  the  horoscope  will  reveal  which  of  the  three 
aspects  is  formed. 


80  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Another  division  of  the  zodiac  is : 

FIERY  SIGNS     EARTHY  SIGNS     AIRY  SIGNS     WATERY  SIGNS 

T  «  n  5 


Planets  in  fiery  signs  are  in  conjunction  or  trine 
if  urifhin  orb.  Planets  in  earthy  signs  are  in  trine 
(or  conjunction) ;  so  are  the  planets  in  airy  or  watery 
signs,  as  shown  in  the  above  diagram. 

Essential  Dignities  and  Exaltation: 

Planets  are  said  to  "rule"  or  to  be  "essentially 
dignified"  in  certain  signs  where  the  essential  nature 
of  planet  and  sign  agree.  When  placed  in  the  oppo- 
site signs,  they  are  in  their  "detriment,"  and  hence 
out  of  harmony  with  their  surroundings. 

Planets  are  more  powerful  in  certain  signs  than 
in  others,  and  are  said  to  be  "exalted"  when  placed 
in  such  signs.  When  occupying  the  opposite  signs, 
they  are  in  their  "fall,"  hence  comparatively  weak. 

The  following  table  will  show  the  planets,  and  the 
signs  in  which  they  are  strong  or  weak,  in  accordance 
with  the  foregoing.  It  will  be  noted  that  each  of  the 
planets,  with  the  exception  of  Uranus  and  Neptune, 
rules  two  signs,  while  the  Sun  and  Moon  rule  only 
one  each.  Also  note  that  Uranus  and  Saturn  are  co- 
rulers  of  Aquarius  and  that  Neptune  and  Jupiter  are 
co-rulers  of  Pisces. 


THE  ASPECTS  81 
TABLE  OF  PLANETARY  POWERS 

Planet         Rules     Detriment   Exaltation  Fall 

0               SI                 £?                 T  ^ 

$               8  =c=             ITtT                 ^  T$ 

e          IITIR          /  x            -  SL 

D                25                 Itf                  8  HI 


y         K  / 

#  TTTl  »a=8  Iff  25 

TW  >vv«  n  Tn  w 

*y-  Awrf  6L  I't 

tp  x  TIE  s  y? 

Critical  Degrees : 

The  following  table  shows  certain  degrees  of  the 
Zodiac  which  are  designated  as  "critical  degrees." 
When  a  planet  is  within  an  orb  of  three  degrees  of 
any  of  these  points,  it  will  be  found  to  exercise  a 
much  stronger  influence  in  the  life  than  otherwise. 
This  influence  will  tend  to  increase  the  strength  of  an 
exaltation,  and  also  to  offset  the  weakness  resulting 
from  a  planet  being  in  its  fall  or  detriment.  It  will 
also  increase  the  strength  of  aspect^  to  that  planet. 

TABLE  OF  CRITICAL  DEGREES 

Cardinal  Signs  —  Aries,   Cancer,  Libra,   Capricorn ; 

1st.,  13th.,  and  26th.  degrees 
Fixed  Signs  —  Taurus,    Leo,    Scorpio,    Aquarius; 

9th.  and  21st.  degrees. 
Common  Signs  —  Gemini,  Virgo,  Sagittarius,  Pisces; 

4th.  and  17th.  degrees. 


82  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Elevation : 

A  planet  placed  in  or  near  the  ninth  or  tenth 
houses  is  said  to  be  "elevated."  The  nearer  it  is  to 
the  Midheaven,  the  more  highly  elevated  it  is.  A 
planet  in  elevation  is  much  more  powerful,  for  either 
good  or  evil,  than  when  placed  at  a  lower  altitude. 

The  Angles : 

When  planets  are  found  in  the  "angles"  of 
the  horoscope  (First,  Fourth,  Seventh  and  Tenth 
Houses)  they  are  said  to  be  angular  or  accidentally 
dignified.  When  so  placed,  they  exert  a  greater  influ- 
ence for  either  good  or  evil,  than  when  located  in  the 
other  houses. 

When  the  student  has  digested  the  above  informa- 
tion he  should  proceed  to  make  a  table  or  index  of  the 
relationship  of  the  planets  as  shown  in  the  diagram 
on  page  89. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

MAKING  THE  INDEX 

Looking  at  the  horoscope  for  8:15  P.  M.  we  note 
that  Saturn  and  Mars  are  in  Aries,  a  Cardinal  sign. 
We  therefore  place  them  under  Cardinal  signs  in  the 
index.  Cancer,  the  next  Cardinal  sign,  contains 
Neptune,  and  that  planet  is  entered  under  the  Car- 
dinal signs  in  the  index.  Libra,  the  third  Cardinal 
sign,  contains  no  planets.  Capricorn  is  the  last  of  the 
Cardinal  signs;  Uranus  is  there  and  when  we  have 
entered  him  in  the  index  we  have  a  complete  list  of 
the  planets  which,  in  this  horoscope,  are  placed  in 
Cardinal  signs- 

The  Fixed  signs  are  Taurus,  Leo,  Scorpio  and 
Aquarius.  In  Taurus  we  find  no  planet.  The  Sun 
and  Mercury  are  in  Leo,  hence  we  enter  them  in  the 
index  under  the  heading  "Fixed."  Scorpio  has  no 
planets  but  the  Moon  is  in  Aquarius.  It  is  therefore 
also  entered  under  "Fixed"  in  the  index. 

In  this  horoscope  the  Common  signs  Gemini,  Sa- 
gittarius and  Pisces,  contain  no  planets,  but  Virgo, 
the  other  Common  sign,  has  Jupiter  and  Venus ;  hence 
these  are  entered  urrder  the  list  of  planets  in  Com- 
mon signs,  as  is  also  the  Part  of  Fortune. 

83 


84  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

This  completes  our  classification  of  the  planets  in 
respect  to  the  temperament,  and  to  make  sure  that  we 
have  entered  all  in  the  index,  we  count  them :  Four 
are  in  Cardinal ;  three  are  classified  as  Fixed,  and 
two  as  Common,  making  a  total  of  nine  planets,  be- 
sides the  Part  of  Fortune. 

That  is  right;  so  we  proceed  in  like  manner  to 
note  the  planets  in  Fiery  signs.  We  enter  them  in 
the  index.  Next  the  Earthy,  Airy  and  Watery  signs. 
We  have  then  made  our  classification  according  to 
elements,  and  again  we  count  to  see  that  we  have  en- 
tered all  the  planets.  Four  are  in  Fiery  signs ;  three 
in  Earthy  signs ;  one  in  Airy,  and  one  in  Watery 
signs.  The  total  is  nine  planets,  which  is  right. 

We  next  note  the  exaltation  etc.,  as  given  in  the 
index. 

Now  we  are  prepared  to  note  the  aspects,  and  the 
student  is  particularly  requested  to  follow  the  system 
as  here  outlined;  then  he  cannot  possibly  miss  any 
aspect. 

Place  the  index  finger  of  the  left  hand  upon  the 
first  or  left  hand  planet  under  the  heading  Cardinal 
in  the  index.  (In  the  present  case  Mars.)  Place 
your  pencil  point  held  in  the  right  hand  on  the  planet 
next  to  the  right  in  the  Cardinal  line  (Saturn  here). 
Note  by  a  glance  at  the  horoscope  if  these  two  planets 
are  in  orb  (6  degrees)  of  each  other.  Here  the  an- 
swer is,  no ;  one  is  4,  the  other  23  degrees.  They  are 
therefore  not  in  aspect.  Keep  the  left  index  finger 


MAKING  THE  INDEX  85 

in  place,  but  move  the  pencil  to  the  right  to  the  next 
planet  (Neptune  here),  and  ask,  are  they  within  orb? 
— again  the  answer  is  no.  Again  the  pencil  point  is 
moved  to  the  right  and  is  on  the  last  planet  in  the 
Cardinal  line  (Uranus)  ;  the  question,  are  the  planets 
under  the  index  finger  and  the  pencil  point  within 
orb,  is  asked,  and  answered  negatively. 

Thus  we  have  ascertained  that  the  planet  under 
our  left  hand  index  finger  (Mars)  has  no  aspect  to 
any  of  the  other  planets  in  Cardinal  signs.  We  then 
move  the  left  index  finger  one  place  to  the  right  (to 
Saturn),  place  our  pencil  point  on  the  planet  next  to 
the  right  of  that  (on  Neptnue  here),  repeat  the 
query,  are  the  planets  under  the  index  finger  and  the 
pencil  point  (Saturn  and  Neptune  here)  within  orb? 
A  glance  at  the  horoscope  shows  that  they  are ;  one  be- 
ing 17  and  the  other  23.  They  are  therefore  in  aspect. 
Our  rule  says  that — Planets  in  Cardinal,  Fixed  or 
Common  signs  are  either  in  conjunction  square  or 
opposition  if  within  orbs ! 

A  glance  at  the  position  of  Saturn  and  Neptune 
skows  that  they  are  not  in  conjunction ;  nor  in  oppo- 
sition; they  must  therefore  be  square  to  each  other. 
We  therefore  write  a  square  and  the  symbol  of  Sa- 
turn in  Neptune's  line  in  the  Index;  also  a  square 
and  the  symbol  of  Neptune  in  Saturn's  line.  Thus 
we  have  recorded  that  aspect- 

We  leave  our  left  index  finger  on  Saturn,  but 
move  the  pencil  point  to  the  right,  to  Uranus.  We 


86  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

repeat  our  query,  are  they  in  orb  ?  The  answer  is  yes, 
and  their  positions  indicate  the  aspect  as  being  a 
square.  This  we  note  in  the  lines  of  Saturn  and  Ura- 
nus as  in  previous  cases.  Then  we  have  recorded  all 
the  aspects  of  Saturn  to  the  planets  to  the  right  of 
him,  and  we  move  our  left  index  finger  to  the  right 
(to  Neptune  and  Uranus)  and  ask  our  question  re- 
garding orb.  The  answer  is  yes.  Neptune  and  Uran- 
us are  within  orb  of  each  other,  hence  in  opposition. 
This  aspect  is  entered  in  the  index  also  and  completes 
the  aspects  of  Neptune. 

We  have  now  noted  in  a  thorough  and  systematic 
manner  all  the  aspects  between  the  planets  in  the 
Cardinal  line.  The  same  mode  of  procedure  we  em- 
ploy with  the  planets  in  the  other  lines  working  in 
each  line  steadily  from  left  to  right.  If  this  method 
is  followed  no  aspect  can  be  missed. 

In  dealing  with  the  planets  in  the  Fiery,  Airy, 
Earthy  and  "Watery  signs,  we  remember  of  course 
that  they  are  in  trine  or  conjunction  if  within  orb. 

In  getting  the  Sextiles  a  different  method  is 
necessary.  Start  with  Mars  (Aries  4  here),  add  60 
degrees,  which  gives  Gemini  4.  Ask,  is  any  planet  in 
orb  of  Gemini  4?  The  answer  is  no.  Pass  the  left 
index  finger  to  the  next  planet  in  the  horoscope  (Sat- 
urn). He  is  in  Aries  23;  adding  60  degrees  gives 
Gemini  23.  There  is  no  planet  within  orb  of  that 
point.  The  left  index  finger  is  passed  on  to  the  next 
planet  (Neptune)  in  Cancer  17.  We  add  60  degrees 


MAKING  THE  INDEX  87 

which  gives  Virgo  17.  We  ask  our  question,  Is  any 
planet  in  orb  of  that  point  ?  The  answer  is  yes — Jup- 
iter in  Virgo  15.  Then  Neptune  and  Jupiter  are  sex- 
tile  and  are  so  entered  in  the  lines  of  both  planets  in 
the  index. 

Proceeding  we  move  the  left  index  finger  to  every 
planet  in  the  horoscope  in  turn ;  adding  60  degrees 
and  asking  our  question.  When  we  have  followed  the 
circle  around  we  shall  also  have  recorded  all  the  sex- 
tiles  and  missed  none. 

The  Dragon's  Head  (£),  and  the  Dragon's  Tail 
( U )  exert  an  influence  in  the  horoscope  only  when 
in  conjunction  with  a  planet  or  the  Ascendant.  An 
orb  of  only  two  degrees  or  at  most  three  degrees  is 
allowed.  The  Dragon's  Head  is  regarded  as  a  benef- 
ic,  its  influence  being  analagous  to  that  of  the  Sun  in 
Aries,  and  Jupiterian  in  effect.  The  Dragon's  Tail 
is  malefic,  being  Saturnine  in  quality  and  having  an 
influence  similar  to  that  of  Saturn  in  Libra.  In  the 
present  case  neither  the  Dragon's  Head  nor  Tail  is 
in  conjunction  with  a  planet,  hence  there  are  no  as- 
pects to  them  to  be  entered  in  the  Index. 

There  remain  yet  the  Parallels.  To  find  them  we 
turn  to  the  page  from  the  ephemeris  for  the  month 
of  birth  (August)  found  in  the  back  of  this  book.  At 
the  top  of  the  page  we  find  the  names  of  the  planets : 
Neptune,  Uranus,  Saturn,  etc.,  and  below  each  planet 
is  noted  its  Declination  for  the  days  of  the  month 
given  in  the  left  hand  column. 


88 


SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 


As  our  G.  M.  T.  is  early  morning  on  August  3rd 
we  place  the  declinations  for  August  3rd  opposite 
each  planet  in  the  index. 

An  exception  is  the  Moon's  declination  which  re- 
quires a  logarithmic  correction  in  accordance  with 
the  G.  M.  T.  This  correction  is  made  by  the  same 
method  used  in  obtaining  the  Moon's  longitude.  We 
thus  find  the  Moon's  decimation  to  be  17-2. 

The  declination  of  the  Part  of  Fortune  is  the  same 
as  the  declination  of  the  Sun  when  in  the  same  sign 
and  degree. 


MAKING  THE  INDEX 

INDEX 


89 


ELEMENTS 

DECL. 

ASPECTS 

CARDINAL 

$    T?  W1? 

O 

17.37 

6  S,  A3 

P3> 

FIXED 

$  0  D 

9 

10.32 

COMMON 

$  y(g> 

$ 

19.32 

c5  0,  A3 

FIERY 

3  T?  S  0 

I 

17.02 

*  i? 

PO 

EARTHY 

$  y  #® 

5 

6.38 

DM,  *  5 

P24 

AIRY 

D 

zj 

6.47 

Aw,  *^ 

PT> 

WATERY 

J 

5 

2.50 

A?  o 

P0 

EXALTED 

j 

* 

22.41 

n^,<s>  W,Aif® 

Pty 

ESSENT'LY 
DIGNIFIED 

3  o 

2 

21.35 

n^,<9  w,*y® 

PI? 

ANGULAR 

9  y  3 

(X) 

2.25 

Aw,  *^P 

P3 

CRITICAL 
DEGREE 

i?  5  0 
9  U 

Q 

RULER 

yu 

g 

Here  the  Part  of  Fortune  is  Virgo  23:43.  Take 
an  ephemeris  for  any  year  and  find  when  the  Sun 
was  there.  That  will  be  about  September  17,  and 
then  the  Sun's  declination  was  2:25  (ephemeris  for 
1909.)  That,  then,  is  the  declination  of  the  Part  of 
Fortune.  In  the  same  way  the  decimations  of  the  Mid- 
heaven  and  the  Ascendant  may  be  found  if  desired. 


90  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Having  entered  all  the  declinations  in  the  index, 
place  the  left  index  finger  on  the  declination  of  Nep- 
tune at  the  bottom ;  the  pencil  point  on  the  declination 
next  above  (Uranus) ;  ask  if  they  are  within  1  degree 
or  at  most  1^  degrees.  The  answer  is  yes,  and  so 
they  are  entered  in  the  column  of  aspects  as  parallel. 
Move  the  pencil  up  the  line,  noting  at  each  step  if 
the  declinations  of  the  planets  under  the  index  finger 
and  pencil  point  are  within  orb  (one  degree  or  a  little 
more.)  "When  the  pencil  point  has  reached  the  top, 
all  parallels  under  the  left  index  finger  will  have 
been  noted.  Then  move  the  left  index  finger  one  step 
up  (to  Uranus)  and  the  pencil  point  up  to  the  declina- 
tion of  the  planet  next  above;  note  their  parallel,  if 
any;  move  the  pencil  point  upward,  step  by  step, 
following  the  same  method  in  moving  from  bottom 
upward  to  get  the  decimation  as  was  followed  by  mov- 
ing the  index  finger  and  pencil  point  from  left  to 
right  to  get  the  conjunctions  squares,  trines  and  op- 
positions. 

When  the  Parallels  have  been  recorded  the  index 
is  finished ;  and  if  placed  below  the  horoscope  on  one 
pheet  of  paper  as  shown  in  the  accompanying  illus- 
tration the  student  will  have  ready  at  hand  every 
means  of  judging  the  figure  without  turning  his  at- 
tention from  that  to  computing  aspects.  Thus  a  more 
concentrated  attitude  of  the  mind  is  attainable  Nei- 
ther is  the  process  of  making  the  index  as  complicated 
as  the  process  of  describing  it;  in  fact,  it  is  simplicity 


MAKING  THE  INDEX  91 

itself,  as  it  involves  no  mathematical  calculation  but 
only  the  proper  methodical  placement  of  the  left  in- 
dex finger  and  moving  a  pencil  point  to  the  right  or 
upward  from  that  finger  merely  asking  continu- 
ally: Are  the  planets  under  finger  and  pencil  within 
orb?  If  this  method  is  followed  out  the  student  can 
never  miss  an  aspect  and  will  be  able  to  make  such  an 
index  in  from  fifteen  to  twenty  minutes. 

In  order  that  proficiency  may  be  achieved,  the 
student  should  endeavor  to  make  the  index  for  the 
horoscope  cast  for  August  2nd.,  8:15  A.  M. 

Aspects  to  the  Ascendant,  which  represents  the 
body,  have  an  influence  upon  the  health.  Aspects  to 
the  Midheaven  indicate  the  nature  of  one's  oppor- 
tunities for  spiritual  advancement.  But  since  the 
exact  time  of  birth  is  rarely  known,  and  since  a  small 
error  in  this  makes  several  degrees  difference  in  the 
Ascendant  or  Midheaven,  predictions  made  from  as- 
pects to  these  points  are  likely  to  be  found  unreliable. 
Hence  we  have  not  entered  them  in  the  Index. 

NOTE  :  In  addition  to  the  foregoing,  planets  in  the 
last  six  degrees  of  any  sign  must  be  compared  with  all 
planets  in  the  first  six  degrees  of  other  signs,  because 
they  may  be  in  aspect  to  each  other  without  coming 
under  any  of  the  preceding  rules.  Examples  of  this 
are  as  follows : 

Mars  in  24-30  Aries  is  in  conjunction  with  Venus  in 
0-30  Taurus ;  Mercury  in  26-0  Taurus  is  sextile  Jupi- 


92  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

ter  in  2-0  Leo ;  Saturn  in  27-0  Gemini  is  square  Ura- 
nus in  2-0  Libra ;  Neptune  in  28-0  Cancer  is  trine  Mars 
in  3-0  Sagittarius ;  Venus  in  29-30  Leo  is  in  opposition 
to  Mercury  in  5-30  Pisces. 

NOTICE    TO   THE   STUDENT  t 

The  foregoing  chapters  describe  the  basis  of 
Astrology  and  illustrate  in  detail  the  method  of 
erecting  a  horoscope.  They  also  indicate  the  elements 
of  the  science  of  reading  a  horoscope.  A  great  deal 
of  additional  information  along  these  lines  is  given 
in  the  Philosophic  Encyclopedia  following.  But  the 
next  volume  in  this  series,  the  "Message  of  the 
Stars,"  is  the  Rosicrucian  text  book  on  the  science 
of  Astrological  Beading,  and  the  application  of 
Astrology  to  our  daily  lives.  It  contains  a  complete 
exposition  of  the  methods  used  in  judging  the  radi- 
cal horoscope,  also  in  progressing  the  chart  and  mak- 
ing predictions  therefrom.  Medical  Astrology  and 
the  diagnoses  of  disease  are  comprehensively  dealt 
with,  as  are  also  the  bearing  of  Astrology  upon  evo- 
lution and  the  general  nature  and  effect  of  planetary 
vibrations. 

All  who  wish  to  go  further  in  the  subject  are 
referred  to  this  volume. 


PART  II. 

A  Philosophic  Encyclopedia 
of  Astrology 


Accidental  Dignity : 

When  a  planet  is  placed  in  an  angle  its  effect  is 
much  more  powerful  than  in  the  succeedent  or  cadent 
houses.  In  this  respect  a  position  in  the  Tenth  House 
is  strongest  on  account  of  elevation  (see  Elevation), 
the  First  House  is  next,  then  the  Seventh,  and  tlie 
Fourth  House  is  weakest. 

Adjusted  Calculation  Date : 

A  date  at  which  the  noon  positions  of  the  planets 
culminate  when  used  in  the  Progressed  Horoscope. 

It  is  obtained  by  a  simple  calculation,  and  with 
it  predictions  may  be  made  in  any  horoscope  for  life, 
without  further  mathematical  computations;  for  a 
full  explanation  the  student  is  referred  to  "The  Mes- 
sage of  the  Stars." 

93 


94  SIMPLIFIED   SCIENTIFIC    ASTROLOGY 

Affliction : 

A  planet  is  afflicted  when  it  is  parallel,  conjunc- 
tion, square  or  opposition  to  Mars,  Saturn,  Uranus 
or  Neptune,  or  in  square  or  opposition  to  any  of 
the  other  planets  (see  Combust). 

Airy  Signs: 

Gemini,  Libra  and  Aquarius  are  called  Airy  signs. 
Their  influence  is  mostly  mental  and  intellectual. 

Angles : 

The  First,  Fourth,  Seventh  and  Tenth  Houses. 

The  Eastern  angle  with  Aries,  where  Mars  is  the 
ruler,  suggests  the  Sun  rising  to  the  material  activi- 
ties of  the  day.  As  the  Sun,  denoting  spirit,  is  under 
the  cross  denoting  matter,  but  rising  toward  it,  there- 
fore it  denotes  the  beginning  of  Life  in  the  material 
world,  and  Mars,  the  ruler,  stands  for  the  desire  na- 
ture, which  draws  the  spirit  towards  material  exi> 
ttnce  in  order  that  it  may  conquer  matter. 

The  Southern  angle,  Capricorn,  with  Saturn  as 
rrler,  suggests  the  Sun  crossing  the  meridian  as  it 
does  at  noon.  It  has  traversed  half  its  prescribed 
journey  across  the  heavens,  therefore  the  half-circle 
is  omitted,  and  the  other  half-circle  is  retained  under 
the  cross  in  the  symbol  of  Saturn.  Hence  Saturn 
denotes  persistence,  mechanical  ability,etc.,  and  the 
Tenth  House  the  worldly  achievements  of  the  human 
being. 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY        95 

The  Western  angle  with  Libra  in  the  balance 
where  the  material  activities  turn  to  the  spiritual, 
divides  the  day  from  the  night;  the  busy  summer 
from  the  inactive  winter.  It  turns  the  waking  hours 
devoted  to  the  active  material  life,  into  the  night 
where  man  contacts  the  unseen  world.  Therefore  the 
circle,  spirit,  is  above  the  cross  of  matter,  the  desire 
nature  has  been  conquered,  and  the  symbol  of  Mars 
turned  upside  down  so  that  it  becomes  the  symbol  of 
Venus,  the  planet  of  love  which  rules  this  house,  and 
which  is  therefore  also  the  house  of  unions,  of  partner- 
ships, the  house  that  denotes  the  one  nearest  and 
dearest  to  us. 

The  Northern  angle,  with  the  sign  Cancer,  marks 
the  time  when  the  Sun  is  at  its  lowest  point.  The 
sign  consists  of  two  suns,  with  the  line  of  force  pro- 
ceeding from  each  one,  but  in  opposite  directions. 
The  line  from  the  sun  which  points  to  the  East  de- 
notes the  direction  in  which  the  physical  Sun  moves. 
The  sun  with  the  line  of  force  going  towards  the  West 
denotes  the  path  in  which  the  spiritual  influences 
turn  after  the  physical  Sun  has  ceased  its  activity. 
This  angle,  therefore,  is  the  angle  of  mystery,  occult- 
ism, and  of  the  dark  and  unseen  side  of  man's  nature; 
therefore  it  has  for  its  ruler  the  orb  of  night,  the 
Moon. 
Angular: 

A  planet  is  said  to  be  angular  when  it  is  placed 
in  the  angles  of  the  horoscope.  This  position  strength- 


96  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

ens  the  influence  of  the  planet  considerably  for  good 
or  ill  according  to  the  nature  of  the  planet  and  its 
aspects. 
Antares: 

See  'Fixed  Stars'. 
Apply: 

When  a  swift  moving  planet  approaches  an  aspect 
with  a  slower,  it  is  said  to  apply  to  a  square,  trine  etc. 
of  that  planet.  As  the  applying  planet  must  be 
speedier  than  the  one  it  applies  to,  it  is  evident  that 
the  Moon  applies  in  turn  to  the  aspects  of  all  the 
other  planets  each  month  when  she  passes  around  the 
zodiac,  but  Saturn  who  takes  thirty  years  to  make 
the  circle  can  only  apply  to  Uranus  which  uses  eighty- 
four  years,  and  to  Neptune  which  takes  a  hundred 
and  sixty-five  years. 

That  rule  holds  good  when  the  planets  move  di- 
rect in  the  Zodiac  (from  Aries  to  Taurus  etc.),  but 
if  the  slower  moving  planet  is  retrograde  (moving 
from  Taurus  to  Aries  etc.),  both  the  planets  may  be 
applying  to  the  aspect.  (See  Direct  and  Retrograde). 

The  influence  of  the  planets  is  always  strongs 
when  they  are  applying  than  when  they  are  sepa- 
rating. 

Ascelli:     See  'Fixed  Stars.' 
Ascendant: 

The  degree  of  the  zodiac  which  is  on  the  eastern 
horizon  at  a  certain  time.  A  new  degree  rises  every 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY        97 

four  minutes,  a  new  sign  about  every  two  hours,  and 
the  twelve  signs  rise  in  every  place  on  earth  in  twen- 
ty-four hours.  Whatever  sign  is  on  the  Ascendant 
is  called  the  rising  sign.  See  'Hyleg'. 

Ascension: 

Under  this  heading  will  be  grouped,  Signs  of 
Long  Ascension,  Signs  of  Short  Ascension,  Right  As- 
cension and  Oblique  Ascension. 

Signs  of  Long  Ascensio  ,  are :  Cancer,  Leo,  Virgo, 
Libra,  Scorpio  and  Sagittarius. 

Signs  of  Slnori  Ascension  are:  Capricorn,  Aqua- 
rius, Pisces,  Aries,  Taurus  and  Gemini. 

They  are  so  called  because  the  signs  of  Long  As- 
cension rise  slowly  in  Northern  latitudes,  taking  a 
much  longer  time  than  the  two  hours  required  if  11 
the  twelve  signs  rose  at  a  uniform  rate  during  the 
twenty-four  hours.  Leo  takes  about  two  hours  and 
forty-five  minutes  in  Lat.  40  North  where  New  York 
is,  and  Pisces  and  Aries,  two  signs  of  Short  Ascensrn, 
take  only  one  hour  and  ten  minutes.  The  reason  lies 
in  the  obliquity  of  the  Ecliptic,  see  page  49.  The 
effect  is  that  most  people  in  the  Northern  Hemisphere 
are  born  under  the  signs  of  Long  Ascension. 

In  the  Southern  Hemisphere  the  signs  listed  as 
of  Short  Ascension  in  the  foregoing  classification, 
are  signs  of  Long  Ascension,  and  most  people  are 
born  under  them,  while  the  Northern  signs  of  Long 


98  SIMPLIFIED   SCIENTIFIC   ASTROLOGY 

Ascension  rise  quickly  in  the  South  and  relatively 
few  are  born  under  them.  Thus  the  people  of  the 
opposite  hemispheres  are  also  opposite  in  their  inner 
natures,  and  show  different  characteristics. 

Right  Ascension  and  Oblique  Ascension  are  not 
used  in  the  system  of  Astrology  generally  in  vogue, 
except  in  the  calculation  of  the  houses,  with  which  the 
average  student  has  no  concern.  Longtitude  is  meas- 
ured on  the  ecliptic  or  Sun's  path  from  the  first  point 
of  Aries,  but  Bight  Ascension  is  measured  on  the 
equinoctial  or  celestial  equator. 
Aspects : 

The  distance  apart  of  planets,  which  determines 
their  influence  for  good  or  ill. 

The  Square  is  90  degrees  and  the  Opposition  is 
180  degrees.  These  are  called  evil  aspects. 

The  Sextile  is  60  degrees  and  the  Trine  is  120 
degrees.  They  are  called  good  aspects. 

The  Conjunction  occurs  when  two  planets  are  in 
the  same  degree  of  the  Zodiac,  and  the  Parallel  is 
the  position  of  two  planets  in  the  same  degree  of 
declination,  regardless  of  whether  they  are  both  North 
or  South  of  the  Equator,  or  whether  one  is  in  North 
and  the  other  in  South  declination. 

These  aspects  are  variable.  If  between  bene- 
fics  (the  Sun,  Venus  and  Jupiter),  they  are  good,  or 
if  the  planets  of  variable  nature  (the  Moon  and 
Mercury),  are  aspected  by  conjunction  or  parallel 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY        99 

with  the  benefics  it  is  good,  but  if  the  Sun,  Moon, 
Mercury,  Venus  or  Jupiter  are  in  conjunction  or 
parallel  with  one  of  the  malefics  (Mars,  Saturn, 
Uranus  and  Neptune),  it  is  evil;  the  conjunction  of 
two  malefics  is  more  so,  but  the  parallel  of  two  mal- 
efics is  exceedingly  strong  in  its  detrimental  influence. 
Conversely,  of  course,  the  parallel  between  two  ben- 
efics is  extraordinarily  fortunate. 

Axis: 

If  we  were  to  pierce  an  apple  through  the  centre 
with  a  knitting-needle,  that  would  be  the  axis  of  the 
apple,  and  on  this  axis  it  may  be  rotated.  The  earth's 
axis  is  an  imaginary  line  on  which  the  earth  rotates, 
and  this  motion  of  the  earth  on  its  axis  produces  the 
phenomena  of  day  and  night.  The  axis  of  the  earth 
always  points  to  a  certain  star  in  the  constellation 
tlrsa  Minor,  which  on  that  account  is  called  the  pole 
star;  the  only  one  in  the  heavens  which  seems  never 
to  move.  It  is  not  quite  stationary  however,  but  has 
an  exceedingly  slow  vibratory  motion  called  Nutation, 
causing  the  pole  star  to  change  in  the  course  of 
milleniums.  See  'Nutation'  and  'Intellectual  Zodiac.' 

Axis,  Inclination  of: 

The  axes  of  all  the  planets  are  inclined  to  their 
orbits.  See  page  8. 

Axial  Rotation: 

All  the  planets  rotate  upon  their  axes  the  same 
as  the  earth,  but  the  time  in  which  they  make  a  rota- 


100  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

tion  differs  widely.     See  'diurnal  rotation    of    the 

planets,'  page  8. 

Barren  or  Unfruitful  Signs :    Gemini,  Leo  and  Virgo. 

Benefics : 

The  Sun,  Venus  and  Jupiter.     For  a  thorough 
synthetic  explanation  of  the  terms  'benefit  and  'mal- 
efic,' see  'Good'  and  'Bad,'  also  pages  76  and  77. 
Cadent : 

The  third,  sixth,  ninth  and  twelfth  houses  are  call- 
ed cadent,  and  so  are  planets  placed  in  these  houses. 
This  position  weakens  the  influence  of  planets,  so  that 
benefics  are  not  so  helpful  and  malefics  not  so  harm- 
ful when  placed  in  cadent  houses. 
Cardinal  Signs: 

Aries,  the  Eastern  sign  entered  by  the  Sun  at  the 
vernal  equinox;  Cancer,  where  the  Sun  reaches  its 
highest  degree  of  Northern  declination  at  the  Summer 
Solstice ;  Libra,  the  Western  sign  where  the  Sun  goes 
into  South  declination  at  the  Fall  equinox;  and 
Capricorn,  where  it  is  in  the  lowest  South  declination 
at  the  Winter  Solstice. 

The  Cardinal  Signs  are  promotive,  they  further 
activity  in  whatever  is  undertaken  under  their  in- 
fluence. 
Combust : 

Any  planet  within  three  degrees  of  the  Sun  is 
said  to  be  combust,  or  burned  up  by  the  Sun's  rays. 
If  Mercury  or  the  Moon  are  so  placed,  it  weakens  the 
mind ;  if  Venus  or  Jupiter,  it  takes  away  their  help ; 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     101 

and  if  one  of  the  malefics  (Mars,  Saturn,  Uranus  or 
Neptune)  is  so  placed,  it  is  evil.    See  'Affliction.' 
Common  Signs: 

Gemini,  Virgo,  Sagittarius  and  Pisces.  They  are 
flexible  and  vacillating  in  nature. 

Conjunction : 

When  two  planets  are  within  six  degrees  of  each 
other  they  are  in  conduction.  See  'Aspects'  and  'Orb.' 

Critical  Degrees: 

See  table  and  description  of  Critical  Degrees  on 
page  81.  These  degrees  mark  approximately  the  end 
of  each  day's  travel  of  the  Moon  through  the  twelve 
signs.  The  Moon  occupies  about  271/£  days  in  its  pas- 
sage around  the  Zodiac,  averaging  about  13  degrees 
each  day.  Thus,  starting  with  the  first  degree  of 
Aries,  the  first  day's  travel  will  end  at  the  13th  de- 
gree, the  second  day's  travel  at  the  26th  degree  and 
so  on.  Following  this  out,  we  find  that  the  Critical 
Degrees  are  the  1st,  13th  and  26th  degrees  of  the 
Cardinal  Signs,  the  9th  and  21st  degrees  of  the  Fixed 
Signs,  and  the  4th  and  17th  degrees  of  the  Common 
Signs. 

Culminate : 

When  a  planet  reaches  Zenith  it  is  said  to  cul- 
minate, for  it  has  then  reached  its  highest  altitude 
and  then  begins  to  descend  toward  the  Western  Node. 
This  expression  is  also  used  concerning  aspects.  When 
a  planet  comes  within  orb  of  another  the  influence  is 


102  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

at  first  weak,  but  it  becomes  stronger  and  stronger  the 
nearer  the  applying  planet  comes  to  the  exact  aspect, 
and  at  that  time  it  culminates  or  reaches  its  maximum 
strength.  Then  when  the  planets  begin  to  separate 
and  the  aspect  is  gradually  dissolved,  the  influence  is 
correspondingly  weakened,  and  finally  ceases  alto- 
gether. 

Cusp: 

The  first  degree  of  a  house  or  sign.  When  the 
Sun  leaves  the  30th  degree  of  Cancer  and  is  in  Leo 
o  degree,  1  min.,  it  is  said  to  be  on  the  cusp  of  Leo, 
the  same  with  respect  to  the  other  signs.  If  Aries 
10  degrees  is  on  the  midheaven,  as  the  cusp  or  di- 
viding line  between  the  ninth  and  tenth  houses  is 
called,  and  Neptune  is  in  Aries  9  degrees  55  minutes, 
it  is  placed  in  the  Ninth  House  on  the  cusp  of  the 
tenth.  If  it  is  in  Aries  10  degrees  5  minutes,  it  is 
placed  in  the  tenth  house  on  the  cusp. 

As  the  influence  of  planets  having  direct  motion 
is  always  forward  in  the  Zodiac,  a  planet  on  the  cusp 
of  a  house  will  always  have  a  stronger  influence  on 
the  affairs  signified  by  that  house  than  a  planet 
which  is  placed  in  the  latter  degrees  of  a  house. 

Declination : 

The  distance  a  planet  is  north  or  south  of  the  Celes- 
tial Equator.  The  highest  north  declination  of  the 
Sun  is  23  degrees  27  minutes,  which  it  attains  at  the 
summer  solstice  the  21st  of  June,  and  at  the  winter 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     103 

solstice  on  the  21st  of  December  it  is  in  the  corres- 
ponding degree,  23  degrees  27  minutes  south  declina- 
tion. Mars,  Mercury  and  the  Moon  reach  declinations 

27  degrees  north,  and  on  rare  occasions  Venus  attains 

28  degrees,  but  the  other  planets,  Jupiter,  Saturn, 
Uranus  and  Neptune,  have  approximately  the  same 
decimation  as  the  Sun. 

Astronomy  teaches  that  the  declination  of  the  Sun 
is  due  to  the  inclination  of  the  earth's  axis. 
Degree : 

A  degree  is  the  360th  part  of  a  circle.  There  are 
30  degrees  in  each  of  the  twelve  signs  of  the  Zodiac, 
and  the  motion  of  the  planets  through  these  signs  is 
stated  in  degrees  and  minutes  of  longitude,  commenc- 
ing with  the  first  degree  of  Aries. 

The  Sun's  path  is  called  the  ecliptic,  and  is  taken 
a.s  the  standard  line  of  celestial  motion  so  far  as  our 
solar  system  is  concerned.  The  planets  zigzag  along 
the  ecliptic  sometimes  a  little  to  the  north  of  the 
Sun's  path,  at  other  times  a  little  to  the  south.  The 
distance  of  a  planet  north  or  south  of  tne  Sun's  path 
is  called  Latitude,  and  is  also  measured  in  terms  of 
degrees  and  minutes. 

For  an  explanation  of  degrees  of  declination,  see 
'declination,'  and  for  the  use  of  degrees  to  measure 
Right  Ascension,  see  'Midheaven.' 

The  foregoing  explanations  embody  the  use  of  the 
degree  as  a  unit  of  measurement  to  fix  the  position  of 
the  planets  on  the  celestial  sphere  containing  the  fixed 


104  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

stars ;  but  degrees  are  also  used  in  geography  to  deter- 
mine the  exact  position  of  any  city  or  place  on  the 
surface  of  the  earth.  Latitude  is  then  reckoned  in 
degrees  from  the  earth's  equator,  which  has  0  degrees 
latitude,  to  the  poles,  which  have  respectively  90  de- 
grees North  and  South  latitude. 

Longitude  is  measured  along  the  earth's  equator, 
180  degrees  East  and  West  from  the  meridian  of 
Greenwich,  which  was  accepted  as  a  starting  point  in 
1884  by  delegates  from  all  leading  nations,  France 
excepted. 

For  the  effect  of  distances  measured  in  terms  of 
longitude  on  the  influence  of  the  planets  see  'As- 
pects.' 

For  the  influence  of  Latitude  and  Declination  on 
the  effect  of  the  planetary  aspects,  see  'Latitude.9 
Descendant : 

The  opposite  of  Ascendant,  the  point  on  the  west- 
ern horizon  where  the  Sun  and  the  planets  set,  so 
called,  because  from  thence  the  heavenly  bodies  com- 
mence their  'descent'  towards  the  nadir  of  the  celes- 
tial sphere. 
Detriment : 

The  opposite  of  'Dignity,'  which  see. 
Dignity : 

A  planet  is  said  to  be  in  its  dignity,  or  to  be  'es- 
sentially dignified,'  or  to  'rule,'  when  it  is  in  certain 
signs  which  agree  with  it  in  nature,  for  then  the 
power  of  the  sign  and  the  power  of  the  planet  are 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     105 

compounded.  The  influence  of  the  planet  is  thus 
strengthened.  Conversely,  a  planet  is  said  to  be  in  its 
detriment  when  it  is  in  the  sign  opposite  to  the  one 
it  rules  for  then  the  nature  of  the  sign  and  the  nature 
of  the  planet  are  incompatible  and  antagonistic,  and 
as  a  result  the  influence  of  the  planet  is  weakened. 

The  table  on  page  81  shows  the  rulership  of 
the  planets  over  the  various  signs  and  a  study  there- 
of will  bring  out  the  underlying  system  and  philos- 
ophy. 

The  Sun  is  the  center  of  our  solar  system,  the 
giver  of  life  and  heat,  and  the  Moon  is  (so  far  as  our 
earth  is  concerned),  the  collector  and  reflector  ol  its 
vitalizing  rays.  The  solar  ray  attains  its  greatest  in- 
tensity in  mid-summer  when  the  Sun  is  in  Cancer 
and  Leo,  during  June  and  July,  and  so  Leo,  the  lion, 
being  a  masculine  sign  of  a  fiery  nature  is  in  essential 
agreement  with  the  nature  of  the  Sun  and  therefore 
helps  to  dignify  and  strengthen  it. 

The  effect  of  the  feminine  Moon  on  the  earth's 
tides  shows  its  inherent  affinity  for  water,  which 
brings  it  into  essential  agreement  with  the  feminine 
watery  sign  Cancer.  On  that  account  Cancer  is  its 
home  where  it  is  strongest  and  most  dignified. 

The  keyword  of  the  Sun  is  Life,  and  that  of  the 
Moon  is  Fecundation.  The  germ  of  life  which  comes 
from  the  Sun  is  planted  and  watered  by  the  Moon 
which  measures  the  period  of  gestation  and  brings  all 
things  to  birth.  Saturn  is  the  planet  of  obstruction 


106  SIMPLIFIED    SCIENTIFIC    ASTROLOGY 

and  decay,  the  reaper  with  hour-glass  and  scythe  who 
cuts  off  the  life  given  by  the  Sun  and  fostered  by  the 
Moon,  when  his  hour-glass  shows  that  the  fruits  of 
life's  experience  are  ripe  for  harvest.  Thus  he  is  the 
planet  of  death,  and  moves  in  an  orbit  on  the  out- 
skirts of  the  solar  system,  which  is  the  boundary 
of  Chaos,  where  all  things  are  dissolved  and  trans- 
muted by  spiritual  alchemy  to  finer  and  finer  tex- 
tures. 

Therefore  Saturn  is  in  essential  agreement  with 
Capricorn  and  Aquarius,  the  signs  occupied  by  the 
Sun  during  the  cold  months  of  mid-winter,  December 
and  January.  When  placed  in  these  signs  his  cold, 
clammy  hand  makes  itself  felt  as  a  powerful  for?e 
that  crushes  life  and  joy,  that  covers  the  life  with  tlie 
gloom  of  death. 

Between  the  orbits  of  Saturn  and  the  Sun  are  the 
orbits  of  the  other  planets,  and  when  arranged  in 
order  of  their  distance  from  the  Sun,  with  the  signs 
of  the  zodiac  so  placed  that  Leo  and  Cancer  are  in  the 
center  with  their  rulers,  the  Sun  and  Moon,  and  Sat- 
urn's signs,  Capricorn  and  Aquarius,  one  on  each 
wing,  it  appears  that — 

Jupiter  whose  orbit  is  inside  Saturn 's,rules  the 
two  signs  next  to  Saturn's,  namely,  Sagittarius  and 
Pisces. 

Mars'  orbit  is  inside  of  Jupiter's,  therefore  he 
rules  the  signs  next  to  Jupiter's,  namely,  Aries  and 
Scorpio. 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     107 

Venus  is  inside  Mars'  orbit,  so  she  is  dignified  in 
the  signs  next  to  Mars'  signs,  namely,  Taurus  and 
Libra. 

Mercury,  which  is  nearest  to  the  Sun,  rules  the 
signs  between  those  of  Venus  and  the  Sun,  namely 
Gemini  and  Virgo-    See  'Exaltation.' 
Direct : 

When  planets  move  with  the  order  of  the  signs 
(from  Aries  to  Taurus  etc.),  they  are  said  to  be  di- 
rect, but  when  they  appear  to  move  contrary  to  the 
order  of  the  signs  (from  Aries  to  Pisces),  they  are 
said  to  be  retrograde.  In  the  ephemeris  a  capital  'R' 
at  the  top  of  the  monthly  page  is  placed  with  the  de- 
grees and  minutes  of  the  planet's  longitude  on  the 
day  when  it  begins  to  retrograde,  and  at  the  top  of 
its  column  while  this  motion  continues.  When  the 
planet  resumes  its  direct  motion,  this  is  in- 
dicated by  a  capital  'D,'  but  there  are  no  *DV  at 
the  top  of  the  columns  in  the  ephemeris  to  indicate 
that  the  planets  are  'direct*  for  that  is  their  natural 
line  of  progression.  The  *RV  are  only  used  to  mark 
that  which  is  an  anomaly. 

The  Sun  and  Moon  are  always  direct  in  their  mo- 
tion, they  are  never  stationary  or  retrograde.     See 
chapter  on  Retrogradation  page  72. 
Directions : 

When  a  child  is  born  it  is  immersed  in  an  atmos- 
phere charged  with  the  stellar  vibrations  peculiar  to 


108  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

that  moment,  which  are  stamped  upon  each  atom  of 
the  sensitive  organism  by  the  air  inhaled  with  the  first 
breath.  This  planetary  baptism  is  the  basic  cause  of 
all  the  child's  characteristics  and  idiosyncrasies;  it 
gives  certain  tendencies  which  remain  through  life. 
This  is  the  Radix  or  Radical  Horoscope  which  we 
carry  about  in  our  bodies  and,  whether  we  know  it  or 
not,  it  is  the  root  of  all  events  in  life. 

But  the  planets  do  not  remain  stationary  in  the 
positions  they  occupied  at  the  time  of  our  birth ;  their 
progress  is  eternal  as  is  that  of  our  Father  in 
Heaven,  and  in  time  they  form  aspects  other  than 
those  which  they  made  at  birth.  These  progressed 
configurations  are  called  Directions,  and  they  mark 
the  time  in  life  when  events  are  due  to  occur. 

Directions  are  of  two  kinds,  primary  and  sec- 
ondary. 

Primary  directions  are  formed  between  the  pro- 
gressed planets  and  their  positions  at  birth.  If,  for 
instance,  the  Sun  was  in  no  degrees  of  Aries  and  Ju- 
piter in  25  degrees  of  Leo  at  the  birth  of  an  individ- 
ual, then,  as  the  Sun  moves  forward  in  the  Zodiac  at 
about  one  degree  a  day,  it  will  be  trine  with  Jupiter 
about  twenty-five  days  after  birth.  The  system  of 
time  measurement  of  the  planetary  progression  in 
general  use  reckons  each  day  after  birth  equal  to  a 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OP  ASTROLOGY     109 

year  of  life.  Thus  the  said  individual  will  meet  with 
a  very  fortunate  event  in  the  twenty-fifth  year. 

Aspects  may  also  be  formed  between  two  pro- 
gressed planets;  to  follow  out  the  example  given  in 
the  last  paragraph,  Jupiter  would  progress  one  or 
two  degrees  in  the  twenty-five  days.  It  would  then 
be  in  26  or  27  degrees  of  Leo,  and  after  the  Bun  had 
passed  the  trine  with  the  radical  Jupiter  it  would 
come  to  the  trine  of  the  progressed  Jupiter  and  this 
would  prolong  the  fortunate  influence  for  several 
years,  though  it  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  the  1- 
fect  of  aspects  between  two  progressed  planets  is  not 
so  strong  as  when  the  configuration  is  between  a  pro- 
gressed and  a  radical  planet. 

Secondary  directions  are  formed  by  the  progres- 
sion of  the  Moon  to  aspects  with  the  planets,  partic- 
ularly the  radical.  These  lunar  aspects  are  of  vital 
importance,  for  unless  the  primary  directions  are 
supported  by  aspects  of  the  progressed  Moon  which 
are  of  a  similar  nature,  they  come  to  naught.  To 
illustrate,  by  reference  to  the  example  of  the  S.m 
trine  Jupiter.  If  at  the  time  when  that  culminated, 
fhe  progressed  Moon  had  been  in  Gemini  25,  sextile 
to  both  the  Sun  and  Jupiter,  that  would  have  given 
a  wonderfully  favorable  impetus  to  the  event  signi- 
fied by  the  direction,  but  had  the  Moon  been  in  Tau- 
rus 25,  square  to  Jupiter  it  would  have  prevented 
the  event  and  caused  trouble  instead.  Had  there 


110  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

been  no  secondary  lunar  direction  at  the  time  the 
event  would  have  remained  latent  until  the  next  lu- 
nar aspect  of  the  progressed  Moon  either  brought  it 
out  to  life  or  withered  it. 

Lunations  (New  Moons)  are  also  powerful  factors 
in  energizing  directions,  particularly  if  they  are 
eclipses.  See  'Lunations'  and  'Eclipses,  also  'Tran- 
sits'. 

Double  Bodied  Signs : 

Gemini,  Sagittarius  and  Pisces.  So  called  because 
in  the  pictorial  Zodiac  Gemini  is  represented  as  a 
pair  of  twins,  Sagittarius  as  a  Centaur,  part  man  and 
part  horse,  and  Pisces  as  two  fishes.  They  are  of  a 
dual,  vacillating  nature,  and  it  is  remarkable  that 
events  in  the  lives  of  people  having  these  signs  prom- 
inent are  repeated.  They  marry  several  times,  their 
misfortunes  never  come  singly,  but  their  good  for- 
tunes also  come  in  multiple. 
Dragon's  Head: 

The  Moon's  North  Node.  The  Nodes  are  points  in 
the  orbit  of  a  planet  where  it  crosses  the  ecliptic,  or 
Sun's  path.  The  one  where  it  crosses  from  south  to 
north  is  called  its  ascending  or  North  node ;  the  other 
point  where  it  crosses  from  north  to  south  is  called 
its  descending  or  South  node. 

When  the  Sun  is  in  the  Bast  and  crosses  the  celes- 
tial equator  from  the  south  to  the  north,  it  enters  its 
martial  exaltation  sign  Aries  as  a  conquering  king 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     111 

at  the  vernal  equinox,  and  all  nature  wakens  to  the 
life,  love  and  labor  of  another  year.  Therefore  the 
point  where  the  lesser  Light  crosses  into  the  north 
declination  is  also  subject  to  a  benign  life-giving  in- 
fluence, such  as  that  ascribed  to  the  Dragon's  Head. 
It  fosters  and  promotes  all  matters  within  its  in- 
fluence. 

But  in  the  Fall  Saturn,  Satan,  or  the  adversary, 
stands  in  Tits  exaltation-sign  Libra  ready  to  vanquish 
with  his  cold  clammy  hand  the  lifegiving  Sun  and 
usher  it  across  its  descending  node,  leaving  the  Nor- 
thern Hemisphere  to  mourn  and  die.  Therefore  the 
Moon's  South  Node,  called  the  Dragon's  Tail,  is 
deemed  to  be  Saturnine  in  its  effect  and  obstructs 
all  things  wherewith  it  is  connected. 

Dragon's  Tail: 

The  Moon's  South  Node.    See  Dragon 's  Head. 
Earthy  Signs:      Taurus,  Virgo  and  Capricorn. 
Eclipses:      See  'Lunations.' 

Ecliptic:       The  Sun's  path  among  the  constellations 
of  the  firmament. 

Election:      See 'Horary  Astrology.' 
Elevation : 

The  zenith  which  is  occupied  by  the  Sun  at  Noon, 
is  the  highest  point  in  the  heavens.  The  nearer  that 
position  a  planet  is,  the  more  elevated  it  is  said  to  be. 
Thus  a  planet  in  the  Eleventh  House  is  elevated 


112  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

above  another  which  is  in  the  Twelfth  House,  and  a 
planet  in  the  Tenth  House  is  elevated  above  all  other 
planets. 

Elevation  is  very  important,  for  it  adds  consid- 
erably to  the  influence  of  a  planet  for  good  or  ill.  If 
Mars,  the  planet  of  dynamic  energy,  is  elevated  and 
in  its  own  sign  Aries,  it  endows  the  person  with  an 
almost  inexhaustible  fund  of  energy  and  an  indom- 
itable courage,  which  will  be  found  lacking  if  he  is 
placed  in  a  weak  sign  and  position  like  Virgo  and 
the  Sixth  House.  Similarly  with  the  other  signs  and 
planets. 

Ephemeris,  plural  Eph-e-mer-i-des: 

An  ephemeris  is  a  twin  sister  of  the  Almanac, 
and  gives  the  geocentric  Longitudes  and  Declina- 
tions for  the  current  year.  It  is  absolutely  necessary 
in  astrological  calculations.  But  just  as  it  is  neces- 
sary to  get  a  new  almanac  for  each  year  to  see  when 
the  Moon  is  new  and  full,  when  it  is  Easter  or  Christ- 
mas, etc.  so  also  is  it  necessary  to  have  an  ephemeris 
for  every  year  when  we  want  to  cast  horoscopes  for 
people.  True,  the  planets  circle  about  the  Sun,  but 
each  has  its  own  specific  speed,  and  they  do  not  come 
into  the  same  position  relative  to  one  another  that 
they  have  while  you  are  reading  this,  until  a  period 
which  is  called  the  Great  Sidereal  Year  (25,868  or- 
dinary years),  has  elapsed.  Therefore  all  horoscopes, 
even  the  horoscopes  of  twins  differ,  and  it  is  neces- 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY      113 

sary  to  have  an  ephemeris  for  the  birth  year  of  any 
person  before  you  can  cast  his  horoscope. 
Equator : 

The  earth's  equator  is  an  imaginary  line  in  a  plane 
at  right  angles  to  the  axis  of  the  earth,  and  midway 
between  the  North  and  South  poles.  It  divides  the 
earth  into  two  hemispheres,  the  Northern  and  South- 
ern. If  a  pole  hundreds  of  millions  of  miles  in  length 
were  thrust  through  the  earth  from  the  equator  to 
the  center  of  the  earth,  the  outer  end  would  inscribe 
a  line  on  the  firmament,  when  the  earth  rotates  on 
its  axis,  and  this  imaginary  line  is  called  the  celestial 
equator,  or  equinoctial.  The  latter  name  is  given  it 
because  when  the  Sun  is  at  the  points  where  the 
ecliptic  or  Sun's  path  crosses  the  celestial  equator 
we  have  the  equinoxes,  the  times  when  the  days  and 
nights  are  of  equal  duration. 

Equinoctial:     See 'Equator.' 

Equinox : 

The  equinoxes  occur  on  the  21st  of  March  when 
the  Sun  enters  Aries,  and  the  21st  of  September 
when  the  Sun  enters  Libra.  At  those  times  the  day 
and  night  are  of  equal  length  all  over  the  earth.  See 
'Equator,'  and  'Precession  of  the  Equinox/ 

Essential  Dignity: 

A  planet  is  strengthened  or  essentially  dignified 
when  it  is  in  a  sign  which  agrees  with  its  own  na- 


114  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

ture.    This  is  thoroughly  explained  under  'Dignity,' 
which  see. 
Exaltation : 

It  is  explained  under  'Dignity,'  that  when  a 
planet  is  in  a  sign  of  similar  nature,  it  is  thus 
strengthened  or  dignified,  but  when  another  planet 
of  the  same  nature  as  the  ruler  enters  that  sign  it 
compounds  its  own  qualities  with  those  of  the  ruler 
and  the  sign,  and  becomes  exalted  or  powerfully 
strengthened.  For  instance,  Aries  is  a  dry,  fiery 
sign.  It  is  ruled  by  Mars,  a  dry,  fiery  planet,  and 
when  the  Sun,  the  source  of  heat  and  the  giver  of 
Life  enters  this  sign  it  is  exalted  to  the  superlative 
degree  of  power,  and  forthwith  Life  begins  to  mani- 
fest in  all  departments  of  nature.  The  point  to  be 
borne  in  mind  concerning  what  constitutes  exalta- 
tion is  that  it  requires  the  compounding  of  three 
similar  natures.  Scorpio  is  also  a  martial  sign,  but 
it  is  watery  and  not  in  as  complete  agreement  with 
the  nature  of  the  Sun  as  Aries,  therefore  the  Sun 
could  not  be  exalted  in  Scorpio  as  it  is  in  Aries. 

As  the  Lord  of  life  and  heat,  the  Sun,  is  always 
opposed  by  Saturn  in  the  rulership  of  their  signs, 
Leo  and  Aquarius,  so  also  the  cold  and  deathly  Sat- 
urn opposes  the  Sun  from  its  exaltation-sign  Libra. 
Venus  and  Mars  are  the  planets  of  attraction  from 
the  point  of  sex,  and  as  all  that  is  generated  by  sex 
is  under  the  sway  of  death,  Mars  has  thus  a  right  t0 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OP  ASTROLOGY     115 

rule  Scorpio,  the  eighth-house  sign  denoting  death; 
it  is  also  properly  exalted  in  the  Saturnine  sign  Cap- 
ricorn, and  Saturn,  the  Lord  of  Death  is  justly  as- 
cribed exaltation-power  in  Libra,  the  cardinal  mas- 
culine sign  of  Venus. 

Cancer,  the  moist  and  feminine  sign  ruled  by  the 
Moon  is  next  to  Leo,  the  hot  and  dry  sign  ruled  by 
the  Sun.  It  is  therefore  required  fcy  the  law  of  an- 
alogy that  the  exaltation-sign  of  the  Moon  should  be 
next  to  that  of  the  Sun,  in  Taurus.  Venus,  the  plan- 
et of  Love,  offers  an  avenue  for  the  expression  of  the 
lunar  forces  of  fecundation,  and  the  moist  feminine 
and  fruitful  sign  Taurus  is  in  entire  agreement  with 
these  tendencies,  hence  this  sign  offers  the  most  pow- 
erful expression  for  the  force  working  through  the 
Moon,  and  she  may  therefore  rightfully  be  called 
exalted  in  Taurus.  Venus  binds  us  in  the  bonds  of 
love  for  the  perpetuation  of  the  race,  therefore  that 
love  is  essentially  selfish,  hence  productive  of  sorrow. 
Who  has  loved  much,  has  suffered  much,  hence  the 
tear-stained  Venus  is  exalted  in  the  watery  twelfth- 
house-sign  Pisces,  the  sign  of  sorrow.  There,  by  the 
purifying  effect  of  grief,  the  earthly,  sensual  love  is 
transmuted  to  Altruism  under  the  benefic  ray  of  Ju- 
piter, the  ruler,  for  it  is  not  the  will  of  our  Father 
that  we  should  suffer  beyond  what  we  can  bear,  but 
He  will  with  every  temptation  provide  a  way  of  es- 
cape. 


116  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Cancer  was  pictured  on  the  ancient  Egyptian  Zod- 
iac as  a  beetle  or  scarab,  which  was  their  emblem  of 
the  soul,  and  it  is  an  esoteric  truth  that  all  souls  en- 
ter terrestrial  life  through  the  sphere  of  the  Moon, 
Cancer.  Conception  depends  upon  the  place  of  the 
Moon  and  the  angle  of  its  ray.  Sagittarius,  the  Cen- 
taur, is  the  symbol  of  aspiration,  the  man  coming  out 
of  the  animal,  and  pointing  his  bow  heavenward. 
This  sign  is  ruled  by  Jupiter,  the  planet  of  Benevo- 
lence, which  is  now  the  seedground  where  our  future 
home  is  being  prepared,  where  we  shall  sometime 
dwell  when  we  have  learned  the  lessons  to  be  taught 
in  the  Earth  Period  and  are  ready  to  take  up  higher 
work  of  the  Jupiter  Period  as  taught  in  the  Rosicru- 
cian  Cosmo- Conception. 

Thus,  as  the  solar  forces  reflected  through  Can- 
cer and  the  Moon  result  in  generation,  so  the  spirit- 
ual ray  of  the  Sun  reflected  through  Cancer  and  Ju- 
piter act  as  a  regenerative  power  strengthening  the 
psychic  and  religious  nature,  and  therefore  Jupiter 
is  truly  said  to  be  exalted  in  Cancer. 

Mercury  is  a  planet  of  a  variable  nature;  it  takes 
on  the  color  and  characteristics  of  any  sign  or  planet 
with  which  it  is  configurated;  therefore  it  has  no 
particular  affinity  with  any  of  the  other  planets  or 
signs  ruled  by  the  other  planets,  and  hence  must  seek 
exaltation  in  its  own  signs.  And  as  Gemini  is 
masculine  it  is  not  so  well  in  accord  with  Mercury  as 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     117 

is  the  listless  negative  sign  Virgo,  hence  that  is  the 
sign  of  Mercury's  exaltation. 

Fall: 

When  a  planet  is  in  the  sign  opposite  its  exalta- 
tion-sign it  is  said  to  be  in  its  'fall,'  for  that  sign, 
its  Lord  and  exaltation-ruler  are  all  of  exactly  the 
opposite  nature.  Thus,  when  the  glorious  Sun  which 
is  exalted  in  Aries,  is  in  the  opposite  sign  Libra 
where  the  cold  and  dreary  Saturn  has  domain,  it  is 
weakened  and  afflicted  thereby.  Conversely,  when 
Saturn  is  in  the  sign  Aries,  the  Sun's  exaltation-sign, 
it  shrivels  and  shrinks  under  the  heat  rays.  When 
the  benefic  amiable  Jupiter,  exalted  in  Cancer,  is 
placed  in  the  opposite  sign  Capricorn,  the  sign  of 
the  surly  Saturn,  and  the  exaltation-sign  of  the 
brusque  Mars  it  is  surely  afflicted  and  in  its  fall. 
Similarly  with  the  other  planets. 
Feminine  Signs: 

The  feminine  signs  comprise  the  six  signs  with 
even  numbers:  Taurus,  the  second  sign,  Cancer  the 
fourth  sign,  etc.  This  includes  the  earthy  signs,  Tau- 
rus, Virgo  and  Capricorn;  and  the  watery  signs, 
Cancer,  Scorpio  and  Pisces.  Earth  and  water  are  the 
two  attributes  of  'Mother'  Nature.  Given  them  she  is 
able  to  bring  forth,  and  so  the  signs  which  have  affin- 
ity with  these  essential  elements  may  well  be  called 
'feminine.'  Even  Virgo,  which  is  essentially  barren 
is  perhaps  the  most  important  of  the  feminine  signs, 


118  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

for  when  the  Sun  is  in  Virgo  during  September,  the 
spiritual  wave  of  rejuvenating  life  commences  its 
descent  into  the  earth  where  it  centres  at  Christmas 
and  then  commences  to  radiate  the  germinal  life 
which  springs  forth  and  blooms  at  Easter.  Then  the 
Savior  having  given  his  life  once  for  all,  once  more  as- 
cends to  the  Father. 

Fiery  Signs:      Aries,  Leo  and  Sagittarius. 

Fixed  Signs: 

Taurus,  Scorpio,  Leo  and  Aquarius  are  called 
'fixed'  signs  because  when  they  are  on  the  angles  of  a 
horoscope  and  many  planets  are  in  them,  they  make 
the  person  very  'set,'  and  give  him  an  unusual 
amount  of  perseverance  so  that  he  will  nearly  always 
achieve  whatever  he  attempts  to  do  if  it  is  humanly 
possible. 

Fixed  Stars: 

The  twelve  constellations  of  the  Zodiac  are  com- 
posed of  a  large  number  of  stars,  and  all  over  the 
firmament  we  see  clusters  of  luminous  bodies,  which 
seem  to  preserve  the  same  position  relative  to  one 
another,  differing  in  this  respect  from  the  Sun,  Moon 
and  planets  which  we  see  moving  among  the  star 
clusters.  Therefore  the  star  clusters  composing  the 
zodiacal  constellations  are  called  'fixed  stars.'  It  is 
a  matter  of  knowledge  however,  that  their  immobil- 
ity is  only  apparent  because  of  their  vast  distance 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     119 

from  us,  and  that  they  are  really  rushing  through 
space  at  an  enormous  speed, 

In  Astrology  we  deal  principally  with  the  twelve 
constellations  of  fixed  stars  composing  the  Zodiac. 
There  is  no  doubt  that  other  fixed  stars  have  an  in- 
fluence on  human  affairs,  but  our  minds  are  still  too 
weak  to  grasp  the  full  significance  of  zodiacal  signs, 
the  planets  and  houses  in  all  their  multitudinous 
combinations,  and  if  we  attempt  to  mix  in  the  other 
fixed  stars  and  their  aspects  we  shall  surely  be  lost 
in  the  maze.  Therefore  the  student  is  advised  to 
consider  only  the  following  fixed  stars:  Pleiades, 
located  in  29  degrees  of  Taurus ;  Ascelli,  in  6  degrees 
of  Leo;  and  Antares,  in  8  degrees  of  Sagittarius. 
These  stars,  it  has  been  observed,  have  a  decidedly 
detrimental  effect  upon  the  eyes.  When  the  Sun  or 
Moon  is  in  these  degrees  and  afflicted  by  one  of  the 
malefics,  or  when  one  of  the  malefics  is  in  one  of 
these  degrees,  and  the  Sun  or  Moon  afflicted  any- 
where in  the  horoscope,  trouble  with  the  eyes  result. 
Figure : 

The  horoscope,  or  map  of  the  heavens  cast  by 
astrologer.s  is  usually  spoken  of  as  a  'figure.' 

Fruitful  Signs: 

Cancer,  Scorpio  and  Pisces,  the  signs  comprising 
the  watery  Triplicity,  are  the  particular  vehicles  of 
the  fertilizing  function  in  nature.  When  the  Moon 
is  in  these  signs  she  pours  out  with  specially  free 


120  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

hand  the  Water  of  Life,  the  fecundating  principle, 
and  it  is  a  matter  of  observation  that  seeds  planted 
when  the  Moon  is  in  these  signs  bear  more  bounteous- 
ly than  when  planted  under  less  favorable  conditions. 
Geocentric  System  of  Astrology : 

When  Corpernicus  proved  that  the  earth  and 
the  other  planets  revolve  around  the  Sun,  he  is  said 
by  scoffers  and  sceptics  to  have  exploded  the  system 
of  Astrology  which  regards  the  earth  as  the  center 
around  which  the  Sun,  Moon  and  planets  circle. 
That  is  a  mistaken  idea,  which  may  perhaps  be  shown 
by  an  illustration.  We  still  continue  to  say  that  the 
Sun  rises,  though  we  know  that  it  is  the  earth  that 
moves  while  the  Sun  remains  stationary;  but  wheth- 
er the  Sun  moves  in  a  circle  around  the  earth,  and 
illuminates  each  portion  of  its  surface  in  turn, 
or  the  earth  moves  upon  its  axis  and  thus  exposes 
one  part  after  another  to  the  rays  of  the  stationary 
Sun,  the  effect  upon  the  earth  is  the  same,  namely, 
we  get  light  and  sunshine  during  part  of  the  twenty- 
four  hours.  Similarly  with  the  other  planets, 
Astrology  judges  their  effects  when  in  certain  posi- 
tions relative  to  the  earth,  regardless  of  how  they 
came  there.  Besides,  it  is  so  much  more  convenient 
to  speak  from  the  geocentric  standpoint  and  say  "the 
Sun  rises  at  six,"  than  to  say  "the  axial  rotation  of 
the  earth  will  bring  us  in  line  with  the  Sun's  rays  to- 
morrow at  six  o'clock."  Even  the  most  arrogant 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     121 

ranter  against  the  so-called  geocentric  fallacy  would 
probably  balk  at  taking  his  medicine  In  that  way. 
Good  and  Bad: 

'Good'  and  'bad*  are  terms  one  often  hears  ap- 
plied to  horoscopes,  aspects  and  planets,  and  it  there- 
fore seems  necessary  to  emphasize  that  in  reality  all 
is  GOOD.  In  the  Father's  Kingdom,  the  Universe, 
there  can  be  nothing  permanently  'bad,'  and  that 
which  we  so  designate  is  really  only  good  in  the 
making. 

It  may  also  be  said  that  a  horoscope  is  not  neces- 
sarily good  because  the  aspects  of  the  planets  are 
by  trines  and  sextiles.  Sometimes  it  is  the  very  re- 
verse, for  it  is  in  the  struggle  of  life  that  we  develop 
strength;  very  few  are  strong  enough  to  stand  pros- 
perity. Chances  are  that  in  a  horoscope  full  of  good 
aspects  there  lurks  the  snare  of  indolence  so  that  the 
person  does  not  exert  himself  and  becomes  drift- 
wood upon  the  ocean  of  life,  while  another  who  has 
what  we  call  a  very  afflicted  horoscope  is  roused  by 
the  adverse  conditions  generated  by  squares  and  op- 
positions, and  by  sheer  force  of  will  conquers  his 
stars  and  masters  his  destiny.  In  that  case,  and 
there  are  many,  the  'bad'  horoscope  is  surely  a  great- 
er blessing  than  a  good  one.  It  is  no  use  to  have 
an  automobile  if  we  are  too  lazy  to  keep  it  oiled  and 
cleaned,  for  it  will  give  us  a  lot  of  trouble,  and  un- 
less we  keep  the  wheels  of  fortune  oiled  by  constant 


122  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

attention  to  the  opportunities  of  life,  the  horoscope 
will  not  help  us  no  matter  how  'good'  it  is.  But  if 
we  have  what  is  called  a  'good'  horoscope  and  do  our 
part,  it  will  prove  a  triumphal  chariot  in  which  we 
may  ride  the  royal  road  of  life.  And  the  best  axle 
oil  is  called  helpfulness.  The  heavier  you  load  your 
car  down  with  lame  and  weary  ones,  the  easier  it 
will  ride. 

And  Saturn !  Yes,  it  is  true  that  he  is  responsible 
for  most  of  the  whip  lashes  of  fate,  but  he  can  give 
us  nothing  that  we  have  not  earned,  and  the  purpose 
is  not  vengeance,  but  education.  The  moment  we 
realize  that  deep  down  in  our  hearty,  we  shall  cease 
to  murmur,  and  ask:  Why  is  this  happening  to  me, 
what  have  I  done  to  deserve  it  ?  Then,  seeking  pray- 
erfully for  the  reason,  that  we  may  learn  to  mend 
our  ways  in  that  respect  and  so  escape  kindred  trials 
in  future,  we  shall  draw  nearer  to  our  Father,  and 
learn  to  kiss  the  cross.  Thus,  instead  of  being  an  un- 
mitigated evil,  the  visitations  of  Saturn  are  opportu- 
nities to  correct  our  wrongdoings  and  learn  wisdom. 

It  is  similar  with  other  so-called  Malefics.  At 
present  their  influence  seems  evil  to  us  because  we 
have  not  learned  to  work  in  harmony  with  them  for 
the  highest  good. 

But  even  today,  the  aspects  of  Saturn  to  the  Moon 
and  Mercury  give  depth  to  the  mind  and  power  of 
concentration,  which  are  decidedly  good.  Mars  in 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     123 

aspect  with  these  planets  energizes  the  mind  and 
makes  it  more  alert;  Uranus  in  aspect  to  them  gives 
a  spiritual  perception  to  those  who  can  express  this 
faculty,  but  they  are  very  few. 

On  the  other  hand,  the  so-called  good  planets 
may  be  decidedly  detrimental  by  fostering  self-indul- 
gence, and  therefore  the  appellation  'good'  or  'bad' 
is  ambiguous.  The  true  esoteric  student  will  care- 
fully cultivate  this  mode  of  mind  with  regard  to  the 
factors  in  Astrology,  and  always  base  his  judgment 
on  this  conception  of  the  planets  and  their  aspects. 

A  malefic  that  is  well  placed  and  aspected  will 
prove  of  more  help  than  a  benefic  that  is  weak  and 
afflicted. 

Great  Sidereal  Tear:    See  'Intellectual  Zodiac.' 
Heliocentric  Astrology : 

A  system  introduced  by  certain  modern  astrolo- 
gers in  an  effort  to  conform  to  the  Copernican  con- 
ception of  the  solor  system  with  the  Sun  as  the  centre. 
It  is  not  satisfactory  however,  for  while  those  who 
practice  geocentric  Astrology  have  the  records  and 
observations  of  past  ages  to  guide  them,  the  votaries 
of  the  new  system  have  mainly  speculation. 
Horary  Astrology : 

The  science  of  judging  how  a  certain  matter  will 
turn  out  from  a  figure  set  up  for  the  time  the  ques- 
tion was  asked.  The  philosophy  is  that  the  same  stel- 
lar influence  which  makes  a  person  sufficiently  anx- 


124  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

ions  to  a^k  the  question  contains  also  the  answer. 
Therefore,  if  the  person  who  wants  to  know  is  an 
astrologer,  he  erects  a  horoscope  for  the  time  when 
he  first  thought  of  consulting  the  stars.  If  a  person 
who  cannot  set  up  a  figure  applies  personally  to  an 
astrologer,  the  latter  sets  up  a  figure  for  the  time 
when  the  question  is  asked  of  him,  and  if  the  question 
comes  through  the  mail,  he  casts  a  horoscope  for  the 
time  he  actually  read  the  question  in  the  letter.  This 
is  very  important,  for  if  the  figure  be  set  up  for  a 
wrong  time,  the  judgment  is  certain  to  be  wrong. 
It  sometimes  happens  that  the  matter  asked  about  has 
not  reached  such  a  state  of  completion  that  the  issue 
is  settled,  and  a  definite  answer  can  be  given.  There- 
fore the  first  tiling  to  do  after  the  figure  has  been 
cast,  is  to  see  if  it  is  'radical,'  and  can  be  judged. 

If  the  first  or  second  degree  of  any  sign  is  rising, 
or  if  one  of  the  three  last  degrees  of  any  sign  rises,  or 
if  the  Moon  is  in  the  last  three  degrees  of  any  sign,  or 
void  of  course,  it  is  not  safe  to  judge  but  the  inquirer 
should  wait  a  more  favorable  time  and  ask  the  ques- 
tion again. 

When  Saturn  is  on  the  Ascendant  or  in  the 
First  House  he  always  obstructs  the  matter,  and  if 
he  is  in  the  Seventh  House  the  astrologer's  judgment 
fails. 

If  none  of  these  things  hinder,  the  figure  may  be 
judged  by  the  following  method : 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     125 

The  Lord  of  the  Ascendant,  planets  in  the  First 
House,  if  any,  and  the  Moon  represent  the  inquirer. 
Determine  next  by  what  House  the  thing  asked  about 
is  ruled,  then  consider  whether  the  Lord  of  that 
House  is  favorably  aspected  with  the  Lord  of  the 
Ascendant,  the  planets  in  the  First  House,  and  the 
Moon.  If  so,  the  matter  will  come  to  a  favorable 
conclusion,  but  if  these  significators  are  aspected  by 
square  or  opposition,  the  matter  will  come  to  naught. 

But  if  someone  else  comes  to  you  with  a  propo- 
sition, and  you  set  up  a  figure  to  aid  you  in  forming 
an  idea  of  what  to  do,  be  sure  to  remember  that  HE 
is  the  prime  mover  in  the  matter,  and  that  therefore 
the  Moon,  Ascendant  and  First  House  are  his  signif- 
icators, while  you  are  represented  6y  the  Seventh 
House  and  its  Lord.  It  does  not  matter  that  you  ask 
the  question,  the  proposition  that  you  ask  about  is 
his;  and  lack  of  this  knowledge  has  been  a  stumbling 
block  to  many  who  have  given  a  wrong  judgment  on 
that  account. 

The  things  signified  by  the  Houses  are  briefly 
as  follows: 

First  House:  Matters  of  an  intimate  personal 
nature. 

Second  House:    Financial  gain. 

Third  House:  Matters  concerning  brothers  and 
sisters,  short  journeys. 

Fourth  House:  Houses  and  lands,  patrimony 
and  removals. 


126  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Fifth  House:  Children,  messengers  and  news- 
papers. 

Sixth  House-.       Servants  and  disease. 

Seventh  House-.  Marriage,  partnership,  law- 
suits. 

Eighth  House:    Legacies. 

Ninth  House :  Travel,  mental  state  and  capacity. 

Tenth  House:     Social  standing. 

Eleventh  House:    Friends,hopea  and  wishes. 

Twelfth  House:    Enemies  and  trouble. 

The  planets  which  aspect  your  significators  fa- 
vorably show  whence  you  may  find  help  to  obtain 
your  wish,  and  the  planets  which  afflict  your  stars 
indicate  what  hinders,  and  by  blending  these  augurs 
you  may  know  what  to  expect  and  how  to  proceed- 
Study  these  rules  carefully  ,and  pay  strict  attention 
to  them,  then  you  will  know  how  to  answer  all  ques- 
tions that  may  be  asked. 

Horary  Astrology  may  also  be  used  to  select  a 
favorable  time  for  commencing  an  important  under- 
taking, for  the  starting  point  of  an  enterprise  is  its 
birth,  and  the  influences  then  governing  will  be  pow- 
erful determinators  of  success  or  failure.  It  is  said 
that  the  Eoyal  Astronomer  who  laid  the  corner-stone 
for  the  Observatory  at  Greenwich  u^ed  this  method, 
and  that  has  certainly  been  a  very  useful  and  suc- 
cessful institution. 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     127 

To  thus  select  a  time  for  an  undertaking  is  called 
"making  an  election." 
Horizon : 

The  birthplace  is,  in  Astrology,  always  consider- 
ed the  highest  point  on  earth,  and  the  principal  cir- 
cle seen  from  there  is  the  horizon.  This  is  either 
sensible  or  rational. 

The  sensible  horizon  is  the  circle  which  bounds 
our  view,  where  heaven  and  earth  seem  to  meet. 

The  rational  "horizon  is  below  the  sensible  hori- 
zon, in  the  plane  of  the  earth's  centre. 
Houses : 

The  Houses  are  divisions  of  the  earth,  as  the 
signs  are  of  the  heavens.  The  Zodiac  appears  to  move 
at  the  rate  of  one  degree  in  every  four  minutes,  but 
the  Houses  are  considered  stationary  relative  to  the 
birthplace. 

The  birthplace  is  always  considered  the  highest 
place  on  earth.  And  from  that  point  four  imaginary 
lines  are  drawn  to  the  four  cardinal  points,  North, 
East,  South  and  West.  Imagine  a  line  drawn  from 
your  birthplace  to  the  point  directly  overhead  where 
the  Sun  is  at  noon.  That  would  be  directly  South, 
and  this  line  is  regarded  as  the  cusp  of  the  Tenth 
House,  which  for  that  reason  is  called  the  Midheaven. 
If  this  line  is  extended  through  the  centre  of  the 
earth,  to  the  opposite  side  of  the  earth  and  thence 
into  space,  that  lower  part  would  point  North,  and 


128  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

form  the  cusp  of  the  Fourth  House  called  the  Nadir, 
which  is  opposite  the  Tenth. 

These  two  points  are  invested  by  the  same  de- 
grees of  the  Zodiac,  at  any  given  time  regardless  of 
whether  the  birthplace  is  near  the  pole  or  the  equa- 
tor. In  the  latter  case,  we  may  also  imagine  a  line 
drawn  at  right  angles  across  the  Meridian,  (as  the 
line  in  the  horoscope  from  the  Midheaven  to  the 
Nadir  is  called), from  East  to  West,  and  that  would 
then  form  the  cusps  of  the  First  and  Seventh  Houses. 
By  dividing  each  of  the  four  sections  into  three  we 
would  have  twelve  compartments  of  equal  size,  name- 
ly thirty  degrees  each. 

But  all  birthplaces  are  not  on  the  equator,  and 
owing  to  the  spherical  shape  of  the  earth  and  the  in- 
clination of  the  earth's  axis,  the  sizes  of  the  houses 
vary  more  and  more  as  we  approach  the  poles,  so 
that  some  houses  may  have  only  twelve  or  fifteen  de- 
grees, while  others  have  more  than  sixty.  See  page 
49  for  a  more  detailed  analysis. 

The  reason  for  this  division  of  the  earth  into 
houses  may  be  comprehended  when  we  consider  that 
the  Sun's  rays  affect  us  differently  in  the  morning, 
at  noon  and  at  night,  also  in  summer  and  winter ;  and 
if  we  study  the  cause,  we  shall  readily  see  that  it  is 
the  angle  at  which  the  ray  strikes  us  or  the  earth 
which  produces  the  difference  in  effect.  Similarly 
with  the  stellar  rays,  Astrologers  have  observed  that 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     129 

a  child  born  at  or  near  noon,  when  the  Sun's  rays 
strike  the  birthplace  from  the  Tenth  House,  has  a 
better  chance  of  advancement  in  life,  other  things 
being  equal,  than  one  born  after  Sundown,  for  the 
latter  generally  remains  a  servant.  Therefore  they 
say  that  the  Tenth  House  determines  social  position 
and  honor,  but  the  Sixth  House,  which  is  just  below 
the  Western  horizon  rules  service  and  employment. 
By  similar  observations  and  tabulations  it  has  been 
found  that  the  other  planetary  rays  affect  the  various 
departments  of  life  when  their  ray  is  projected 
through  the  other  houses,  and  therefore  each  house 
is  said  to  'rule'  certain  things.  The  student  will  find 
a  diagram  of  the  houses  and  the  affairs  ruled  by  each 
on  pages  30  and  31. 

The  divisions  of  houses  are  sometimes  called 
'mundane'  houses  to  emphasize  that  they  are  div- 
isions of  the  earth;  and  the  signs  of  the  Zodiac  are 
also  loosely  spoken  of  as  the  'houses'  or  'homes,'  of 
the  planets  which  rule  them,  for  instance,  Virgo  is 
the  'house'  of  Mercury,  Capricorn  is  the  'home'  of 
Saturn. 
Hyleg: 

A  term  used  by  ancient  Arabian  Astrologers  to 
designate  the  points  in  the  horoscope  which  are  the 
principal  foci  of  vitality  and  health,  namely  the  Sun, 
Moon  and  Ascendant. 


130  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

It  needs  but  little  argument  to  show  that  the 
great  and  glorious  reservoir  of  life  which  we  call  the 
Sun  is  an  important  factor  in  the  matter  of  health, 
and  that  the  lesser  Light,  the  Moon,  has  dominion  in 
this  respect,  for  she  collects  and  reflects  the  solar  ray. 
And  it  is  a  matter  of  common  knowledge  that  she  is 
in  some  way  connected  with  gestation,  and  parturi- 
tion, therefore,  the  Moon  is  the  particular  sig- 
nificator  of  health  in  a  woman's  horoscope  while  the 
Sun  has  the  strongest  influence  in  a  man's  figure. 
Both  are  important  however,  for  if,  in  a  man's  fig- 
ure, Saturn  is  square  to  the  Moon  he  will  feel  it,  but 
if  this  configuration  happens  in  a  woman's  horoscope, 
she  will  feel  it  more;  and  conversely,  Saturn  square 
to  the  Sun  in  a  woman's  horoscope  will  affect  her 
health,  but  not  in  the  same  degree  as  it  will  that  of 
a  man  when  occurring  in  his  figure. 

The  reason  why  the  Ascendant  is  designated  aa 
a  factor  in  health  and  vitality  is  not  so  apparent  up- 
on the  surface,  but  when  we  realize  that  the  Ascend- 
ant at  birth  is  the  Moon's  place  at  conception,  the 
reason  is  obvious,  for  the  Moon  is  the  planet  of  fe- 
cundation, the  focus  and  reflector  of  the  solar  Life- 
forces,  and  if,  at  the  time  of  conception,  when  the 
human  seed-atom  was  planted,  she  was  in  a  weak  sign 
like  Virgo,  there  is  a  fundamental  lack  of  energy  and 
vitality  at  the  very  start  of  life,  and  a  consequent 
lassitude  which  affects  through  all  the  years  of  its 
existence,  the  body  then  beginning  to  germinate. 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     131 

Thus,  to  sum  up,  the  Sun,  Moon  and  Ascendant 
are  all  important  significators  of  health  and  vitality 
for  both  sexes,  but  the  position  and  aspects  of  the 
Moon  are  more  important  to  a  woman  than  those  of 
the  Sun  and  Ascendant,  and  the  position  and  aspects 
of  the  Sun  are  more  vital  to  the  health  of  a  man  than 
the  two  other  factors. 

In  modern  times  the  word  'Hyleg,'  and  the  des- 
ignation of  the  vital  parts  of  the  horoscope  as  'hy- 
legiacaP  places  are  not  generally  used.  The  writer 
always  speaks  of  them  as  'significators  of  health,' 
then  everybody  understands  what  is  meant,  and  it 
seems  senseless  to  befog  the  subject  with  mysterious 
terms  when  good,  plain  English  conveys  our  mean- 
ing so  much  better.  It  should  also  be  understood 
that  to  judge  any  subject,  be  it  health,  wealth,  joy 
or  sorrow  or  any  other  thing  that  may  befall,  the 
special  significators  give  only  a  limited  amount  of 
information.  To  obtain  a  really  comprehensive 
knowledge  each  subject  must  be  judged  from  the 
horoscope  as  a  whole. 

Infortunes  or  Malefics: 

Mar#,  Saturn,  Uranus  and  Neptune,  for  explan- 
ation see  'Good'  and  'Bad.' 

Inferior  Planets: 

Astronomers  so  designate  Venus  and  Mercury, 
because  they  always  remain  very  close  to-  the  Sun, 
and  are  never  seen  in  parts  of  the  heavens  opposite 


132  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

the  Sun.    The  idea  in  the  minds  of  the  astronomers 
seems  to  be  that  these  planets  are  in  leading  strings 
so  to  speak.    The  esoteric  reason  for  their  proximity 
to  the  Sun  will  be  found  on  page  10,  which  see. 
Intellectual  Zodiac: 

On  either  side  of  the  ecliptic  or  Sun's  path  are 
a  number  of  fixed  stars  which  form  twelve  groups  or 
constellations,  that  are  called  'signs  of  the  Zodiac,' 
not  because  they  resemble  the  animals  they  are  sup- 
posed to  represent,  but  because  their  influence  has 
developed,  or  is  still  engaged  in  bringing  out  in  us 
the  main  characteristics  embodied  in  the  animal  sym- 
bol. The  bombastic  arrogance,  the  energy  and  cour- 
age which  come  from  Aries  could  not  be  better  sym- 
bolized than  by  the  ram,  neither  could  the  quiet,  but 
prodigious  strength  and  the  stubborn  persistence 
which  come  from  the  divine  Hierarchs  who  work 
with  us  from  the  constellation  Taurus  be  more  aptly 
described  than  by  the  symbolic  'Bull.'  The  char- 
acteristics of  the  other  signs  must  be  interpreted  in 
similar  terms,  for  the  Zodiac  is  fhe  womb  of  the  so- 
lar system;  and  sometime  when  we  and  the  myriads 
of  other  beings  who  are  now  evolving  in  our  solar 
system  have  learned  all  the  lessons  of  this  phase  of 
existence,  we  also  shall  form  a  Zodiac  and  perform 
a  similar  service  for  others  as  the  twelve  Great  Cre- 
ative Hierarchies  are  now  doing  for  us. 

These  twelve  constellations  are  called  the  'natu- 
ral* Zodiac ;  they  remain  always  in  the  same  relative 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     133 

positions,  at  least  their  movement  is  so  slight  that 
centuries  elapse  without  appreciable  change  in  their 
position.  Hence  we  may  use  a  table  of  houses  our 
whole  life,  but  we  must  buy  an  ephemeris  of  the 
planets'  places  every  year. 

Every  year  on  the  21st  of  March  the  Sun  leaves 
the  Southern  Hemisphere,  crosses  the  celestial  equa- 
tor, and  enters  the  Northern  degrees  of  latitude 
where  he  remains  during  the  summer.  But  owing 
to  a  vibratory  motion  of  the  poles  of  the  earth,  call- 
ed 'nutation'  by  astronomers,  the  Sun  crosses  the 
celestial  equator  a  little  earlier  (precedes)  than  it 
did  the  year  before,  and  as  day  and  night  are  of 
equal  length  at  the  point  where  the  Sun  crosses  the 
celestial  equator  or  equinoctial,  this  precedent  cross- 
ing is  called  'the  precession  of  the  equinox-' 

If  there  were  no  precession  of  the  equinox  the 
Sun  would  always  enter  the  constellation  Aries  at 
the  vernal  equinox,  but  on  account  of  this  backward 
motion  of  one  degree  in  about  seventy-two  years,  the 
vernal  equinox  occurs  in  the  first  degree  of  Pisces 
about  2156  years  later.  After  a  similar  period  of 
time  it  recedes  to  the  first  degree  of  Aquarius,  and  so 
on  through  the  circle  of  the  twelve  signs  in  about  25,- 
868  years.  At  the  time  when  the  Sun  was  in  Taurus, 
the  sign  of  the  'Bull,'  at  the  vernal  equinox,  the  an- 
cient Egyptians  worshiped  the  sacred  'Bull  Apis' 
and  their  priests  wore  the  Uraeus  or  Serpent  Symbol 


134  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

belonging  to  Scorpio,  the  Serpent  sign  opposite  Tau- 
rus, to  indicate  their  possession  of  the  esoteric  wis- 
dom. When  the  Sun  went  into  Aries  by  precession 
it  became  idolatry  for  'the  chosen  people'  to  worship 
the  'Bull/  or  golden  calf;  they  left  'Egypt'  and  pin- 
ned their  faith  to  the  'lamb'  or  'ram'  which  was  then 
'slain'.  But  according  to  the  esoteric  symbol  of  Lib- 
ra, the  scales  of  justice,  which  is  opposite  Aries,  he 
shall  come  again  as  judge.  In  A.  D.  498  the  Sun  was 
in  the  first  degree  of  Aries  at  the  equinox,  and  in  the 
1418  years  which  have  since  elapsed  it  has  receded 
nineteen  degrees,  forty-two  minutes,  so  that  in  1916 
the  Sun  crosses  the  equator  in  ten  degrees,  eighteen 
minutes  of  Pisces,  and  in  the  year  2658  it  will  be  on 
the  cusp  of  Aquarius.  During  the  2000  years  which 
have  elapsed  since  the  equinox  came  within  orb  of 
Pisces,  the  fishes,  the  religious  rites  have  required 
that  the  people  anoint  themselves  with  the  Piscean 
Water  at  the  door  of  the  church,  the  Service  was  per- 
formed by  a  priest  whose  headgear  wa,s  made  to  re- 
semble the  head  of  a  fish,  and  they  were  commanded 
to  abstain  from  the  eating  of  meat  at  certain  times, 
and  bade  eat  fish  instead.  They  were  also  taught 
to  worship  an  immaculate  Virgin  because  Virgo  is 
the  sign  opposite  Pisces;  and  this  worship  will  con- 
tinue, though  in  a  decreasing  degree  until  the  new 
ideal  embodied  in  the  sign  Aquarius  and  its  opposite 
sign  Leo  has  superceded  orthodox  Christianity  as 
that  has  taken  the  place  of  the  earlier  religions. 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     135 

Since  the  middle  of  last  century  the  Aquarian  in- 
fluence, focused  by  the  equinox,  has  made  itself  felt 
because  the  Sun's  orb  is  so  large  that  it  touches  the 
cusp  of  Aquarius,  and  as  a  consequence  we  have  had 
an  unprecedented  awakening  of  thought  and  a  gal- 
axy of  inventions  previously  undreamed  of  as  remot- 
est possibilities.  But  as  the  years  go  on,  the  equinoc- 
tial Sun  will  illuminate  our  minds  in  such  a  manner 
as  to  justify  our  grandchildren  in  speaking  of  this 
as  "the  dark  age";  and  when,  in  the  year  2658,  the 
Sun's  actual  entrance  into  Aquarius  ushers  in  a  new 
age,  they  will  be  justified  in  thinking  of  the  Piscean 
age  as  we  do  of  the  time  B.  C. 

We  see  then,  that  there  is  a  natural  Zodiac  com- 
posed of  the  stationary  star  clusters,  Aries,  Taurus, 
etc.,  and  a  shifting  Zodiac,  which  starts  at  the  equi- 
noctial point,  no  matter  where  in  the  constellations 
that  occurs;  and  the  first  thirty  degrees  from  that 
point  are  called  Aries,  the  next  thirty  degrees  are 
called  Taurus,  and  so  on.  This  is  the  intellectual 
Zodiac. 

This  may  seem  an  arbitrary  manner  of  division 
but  it  is  a  matter  of  observation  that  though  the  equi- 
nox actually  occurs  in  Pisces  ten  degrees  at  the  pres- 
ent time,  the  Spring  activities  ascribed  to  the  Sun 
in  Aries  commence  at  once  after  the  equinox.  There 
is,  however,  a  blending  of  Aries  and  Pisces  which  ac- 


136  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

counts  for  certain  evolutionary  changes.    In  this  con- 
nection the  student  is  referred  to  pages  26  and  27. 

Intercepted : 

See  article  on  ' Houses'  before  reading  this.  In 
the  article  on  'Houses,'  it  is  stated  that  owing  to  the 
spherical  shape  of  the  earth  and  the  inclination  of 
the  earth's  axis,  some  of  the  mundane  houses  in  the 
higher  Northern  latitudes  are  only  twelve  or  fifteen 
degrees,  while  others  are  forty,  fifty  or  sixty  de- 
grees long.  But  the  signs  of  the  Zodiac  are  only 
thirty  degrees,  and  it  therefore  follows  that  in  cases 
where  a  mundane  house  is  very  long,  one  or  even  two 
whole  signs  may  be  included  within  its  cusps.  In 
the  horoscope  of  Erman  C.  born  January  25th,  1912 
at  3  A.  M.  in  Ogden,  la.,  we  find  24  degrees  of  Sagit- 
tarius on  the  second  cusp,  and  Aquarius  11  on  the 
third.  Thus  the  second  house  is  forty-seven  degrees 
long,  including  the  whole  sign  Capricorn  with  the 
planets  Mercury  and  Uranus,  and  an  astrologer 
would  describe  the  situation  by  saying  that  Capri- 
corn is  'intercepted'  in  the  second  house.  When  he 
speaks  of  the  planets  in  this  intercepted  sign  he  says 
that  Mercury  and  Uranus  are  intercepted  in  Capri- 
corn in  the  second  house. 

When  a  sign  is  intercepted  in  a  house,  fhe  oppo- 
site sign  is  also  intercepted  in  the  opposite  house; 
consequently  we  find  Cancer  intercepted  in  the 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY      137 

eighth  house  with  Neptune  in  it. 

Regarding  the  influence  of  interception,  we  find 
that  when  a  planet  is  in  an  intercepted  sign  its  in- 
fluence is  held  in  abeyance  or  latency  until  by  pro- 
gression it  moves  out  of  the  intercepted  sign.  This 
tendency  may  be  somewhat  modified  by  a  strong  as- 
pect, or  a  number  of  minor  or  weak  ones,  but  an  in- 
tercepted planet  never  has  the  same  power  over  the 
life  as  one  that  is  free. 

Latitude : 

In  Astronomy,  the  distance  a  planet  is  North  or 
South  of  the  ecliptic,  or  Sun's  path. 

In  Geography,  the  distance  a  city  or  place  is 
North  or  South  of  the  Equator. 

Note — The  distance  of  the  heavenly  bodies  North  or 
South  of  the  celestial  equator  is  not  caUed  latitude, 
but  DECLINATION.  When  the  Sun  is  at  its  highest 
Northern  point  in  the  tropic  of  Cancer,  we  do  not 
say  that  it  is  in  twenty-three  degrees  of  North  lati- 
tude, but  that  it  is  in  twenty-three  degres  of  North 
declination.  See  'Declination.' 

Lights:        The  Sun  and  Moon. 
Logarithms : 

Were  originally  invented  by  Lord  Napier  to  make 
arithmetical  calculations  easy.  They  were  later  adapt- 
ed to  the  decimal  system,  and  are  used  by  astrono- 


138  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

mers  who  calculate  directions  by  arc.  But  for  cal- 
culation of  the  planets'  places  by  Longitude  and 
in  relation  to  the  day  of  twenty-four  hours,  it  is  nec- 
essary to  calculate  a  special  set,  which  will  be  found 
in  the  back  of  our  ephemeris.  By  use  of  them  mul- 
tiplication is  performed  by  addition,  and  division  by 
subtraction. 

Long  Ascension:       Signs  of,  See  'Ascension.' 
Longitude : 

In  Geography,  Longitude  is  measured  from  the 
Meridian  of  Greenwich,  East  or  West  on  the  Equa- 
tor. 

In  Astronomy,  the  Longitude  of  the  planets  is 
measured  on  the  ecliptic  or  Sun's  path  starting  with 
the  first  point  of  Aries  at  the  vernal  equinox.  When 
the  distance  is  reckoned  on  the  equinoctial,  or  celes- 
tial equator  it  is  called  Eight  Ascension. 

Lord: 

A  planet  is  said  to  be  'Lord'  of  the  signs  it  rules ; 
e.  g.  Mars  is  Lord  of  Aries  and  Scorpio;  Venus  is 
'Lady'  of  Taurus  and  Libra.  See  'Dignity'  and  'Ex- 
altation. ' 

Luminaries:       The  Sun  and  Moon. 
Lunar:       Pertaining  to  'Luna,'  the  Moon. 
Lunation : 

A  lunation  is  a  conjunction  of  the  Sun  and  Moon, 
a  'New  Moon.'  In  our  ephemeris  all  New  Moons, 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     139 

Full  Moons,  and  eclipses  are  plainly  marked  at  the 
head  of  the  pages. 

When  a  lunation  falls  within  three  degrees  of  an 
aspect  to  any  of  the  planets  or  other  vital  points  in 
the  radical  horoscope  it  has  a  marked  effect  upon  af- 
fairs during  the  current  month,  and  will  easily  take 
the  place  of  an  aspect  of  the  progressed  Moon  which 
is  needed  to  fructify  the  planetary  indications  then 
in  force.  Even  apart  from  primary  directions,  if  a 
New  Moon  falls  in  close  conjunction  with  a  malefic, 
it  will  produce  trouble  in  minor  matters,  and  con- 
versely, a  lunation  which  falls  on  the  place  of  Ju- 
piter or  Venus  will  make  things  pleasant. 

When  a  New  Moon  is  a  solar  eclipse  it  produces 
first,  the  usual  effect  of  a  lunation  during  its  current 
month,  if  in  aspect  with  any  of  the  radical  planets, 
and  secondly,  similar  effects  during  the  months  of  the 
following  year  when  aspects  of  the  same  nature  are 
formed  with  the  place  of  the  eclipse.  That  is  to  say, 
if  the  eclipse  fell  in  the  twelfth  house  in  Leo,  square 
to  Mars  in  Scorpio,  in  the  third  house,  then  it 
would  produce  enmity  with  brothers  and  sisters  dur- 
ing the  month  of  August  when  the  eclipse  was  form- 
ed. In  November  when  the  lunation  occurs  in  Scor- 
pio more  fuel  will  be  added  to  the  fire  by  the  square 
with  the  eclipse.  In  February  when  the  Sun  is  in  op- 
position to  the  eclipse  there  will  be  more  trouble 
from  the  same  source,  and  also  in  May  when  the  last 


140  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

square  occurs.  Conversely,  if  the  initial  aspect  of  the 
eclipse  is  good,  more  benefit  will  be  experienced  dur- 
ing the  months  when  sextiles  and  trines  are  formed. 

The  cycle  of  lunations  is  nineteen  years ;  for  exam- 
ple, in  July  1900  the  lunation  occurred  on  the  26th 
of  July  in  three  degrees  of  Leo,  and  in  1919  another 
lunation  will  occur  on  the  26th  of  July  in  three  de- 
grees of  Leo.  Thus  the  student  may  calculate  the 
lunations  of  future  years  with  sufficient  accuracy  for 
all  practical  purposes. 

Eclipses  may  also  be  calculated  for  future  years 
in  a  similarly  easy  rough  and  ready  manner  if  the 
student  has  the  ephemerides  for  past  years. 

During  her  monthly  course  the  Moon  zigzags 
across  the  ecliptic,  and  at  the  conductions,  or  New 
Moons,  is  generally  a  number  of  degrees  away  from 
the  ecliptic.  Under  such  conditions  we  have  just  an 
ordinary  New  Moon.  In  order  to  have  a  total  solar 
eclipse  the  Moon  must  be  directly  in  the  Sun's  path 
as  seen  from  the  earth,  and  the  declination  of  the 
Sun  and  Moon  must  be  practically  the  same ;  also  the 
moon  must  have  practically  no  latitude. 

There  are  never  less  than  two  eclipses  in  a  year, 
and  they  are  solar,  nor  are  there  ever  more  than  sev- 
en, but  these  extreme  numbers  happen  very  seldom. 
The  usual  number  of  eclipses  is  four;  two  solar  and 
two  lunar  eclipses,  and  they  usually  come  in  pairs 
and  six  months  apart.  The  Full  Moon  preceding  or 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     141 

following  a  solar  eclipse  is  usually  a  lunar  eclipse. 
Also  if  one  pair  of  eclipses  occurs  in  February,  look 
for  the  other  pair  in  August. 

Bearing  the  above  in  mind,  eclipses  in  any  year 
may  be  found  with  fair  success  by  the  following  sim- 
ple rule : 

(1.)  From  the  year  for  which  eclipses  are  want- 
ed, subtract  18.  The  resulting  year  we  will  call  the 
'Eclipse  Tear.' 

(2.)  Search  the  'Eclipse  Year'  for  New  and 
Full  Moons  which  are  eclipses.  Note  their  dates 
only. 

(3.)  In  the  year  previous  to  the  'Eclipse  Year,' 
note  the  dates  and  zodiacal  places  of  the  lunations 
which  occur  about  eleven  days  after  the  dates  ob- 
tained in  the  'Eclipse  Year.'  These  are  the  dates  and 
places  of  eclipses  in  the  year  wanted. 

In  order  to  test  the  simple  rules  of  thumb  here 
given,  let  us  imagine  this  is  the  year  1910,  and  that 
we  want  to  find  the  first  solar  eclipse  occurring  in 
1915.  We  take  an  ephemeris  for  1897  which  is 
eighteen  years  earlier  than  1915,  and  look  for  the 
first  solar  eclipse. 

"We  find  a  solar  eclipse  on  the  1st  of  February 
1897. 

To  ascertain  the  date  and  degree  of  the  Zodiac  in 
which  this  eclipse  will  fall  in  1915,  we  look  for  in- 


142  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

formation  in  the  ephemeris  for  1896,  which  is  one 
year  earlier  than  the  'Eclipse  Year'  1897. 

There  we  find  that  the  first  New  Moon  which  oc- 
curred after  February  1st,  fell  in  the  afternoon  of 
the  13th  of  February,  in  twenty-four  degrees,  nine- 
teen minutes  of  Aquarius,  and  we  therefore  judge 
that  there  will  be  a  solar  eclipse  on  the  13th  of  Feb- 
ruary 1915  in  twenty-four  degrees,  nineteen  min- 
utes of  Aquarius. 

After  completing  our  calculations  we  cease  to 
make  believe  about  living  in  1910,  and  take  up  the 
ephemeris  for  1915  to  see  if  our  rules  have  given  the 
right  result;  and  we  find  that  a  solar  eclipse  did  oc- 
cur on  the  morning  of  the  14th  of  February  1915,  in 
Aquarius,  twenty-four  degrees,  forty-two  minutes, 
proving  the  rule  to  have  given  an  essentially  cor- 
rect result.  See  'Transits.' 
Malefics : 

Mars,  Saturn,  Uranus  and  Neptune.  See  'Good 
and  Bad.' 

Masculine  Signs: 

Aries,  Gemini,  Leo,  Libra,  Sagittarius  and  Aquar- 
ius are  called  Masculine.  These  include  the  fiery 
triplicity,  Aries,  Leo  and  Sagittarius,  and  the  airy 
triplicity,  Gemini,  Libra  and  Aquarius.  The  femi- 
nine signs  include  the  earthy  and  watery  triplicities. 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     143 

Earth  and  water  are  negative  and  inert,  but  are 
acted  upon  by  the  positive  elements.  The  winds  stir 
the  waters  of  the  ocean  and  volcanic  fires  shake  the 
earth.  Therefore  the  fiery  and  airy  signs  are  called 
masculine.  See  'Feminine  Signs.' 
Meridian : 

An  imaginary  circle  drawn  between  the  North 
and  South  poles  over  the  face  of  the  earth.  As  this 
line  runs  directly  North  and  South,  all  places  locat- 
ed thereon  have  noon  at  the  same  time.  See  '  Houses.' 
Midheaven,  or  Zenith: 

The  point  in  the  sky,  directly  overhead.      When 
it  is  noon,  the  Sun  is  in  the  Midheaven.     It  is  usually 
written  M.  C.      See  'Houses.' 
Movable  Signs. 

Aries,  Cancer,  Libra  and  Capricorn.     See  'Car- 
dinal Signs.' 
Mundane  Houses,  and  Mundane  Aspects: 

See  'Houses.' 

Mutual  Reception:      See  'Reception.' 
Nadir,  or  Immum  Coeli,  usually  written  I.  C. 

The  point  in  the  heavens  directly  beneath  the 
birthplace  opposite  the  other  side  of  the  earth.  It 
is  the  point  opposite  to  the  Midheaven.  The  Sun  is 
there  at  Midnight.  See  'Midheaven'  and  'Houses.' 


10 


144  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Nativity : 

The  same  as  'Horoscope,'  and  'Radix;'  a  map  of 
the  heavens  cast  for  the  moment  of  birth.  See 
'Figure.' 

Natural  Zodiac:        See  'Intellectual  Zodiac.' 
Nebulae : 

Cloudy  star  clusters,  worlds  in  the  making.  Three 
of  them  are  known  to  have  an  inimical  effect  on  the 
eyesight.     See  'Fixed  Stars.' 
Nodes:       See 'Dragon's  Head.' 
Northern  Signs: 

Aries,  Taurus,  Gemini,  Cancer,  Leo,  and  Virgo. 
So  called  because  the  Sun  is  in  these  signs  when  he 
is  above  the  equator  in  the  Spring  and  Summer. 
Nutation : 

A  vibratory  motion  of  the  axis  of  the  earth  which 
is  responsible  for  the  precession  of  the  equinox.    See 
'Intellectual  Zodiac.' 
Oblique  Ascension:     See  'Ascension.' 
Occidental : 

"Western.  When  the  Sun  or  planets  have  passed 
the  Zenith,  Midheaven  or  noon  mark,  they  begin  to 
set  towards  the  Western  horizon,  therefore  the  plan- 
ets in  the  ninth,  eighth  and  seventh  houses  of  the 
horoscope  are  said  to  be  'occidental'  or  Western,  and 
planets  in  the  twelfth,  eleventh  and  tenth  houses 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     145 

which  are  ascending  from  the  Eastern  horizon  to  the 
Midheaven,  as  the  Sun  does  in  the  forenoon,  are  said 
to  be  'oriental'  or  Eastern. 

But  when  the  Sun  sets  in  the  place  where  we  live, 
it  rises  on  another  part  of  the  world  represented  by 
the  sixth,  fifth,  fourth,  third,  second  and  first  houses 
of  our  horoscope,  and  during  that  time  it  is  also  or- 
iental, and  occidental  to  their  Midheaven,  which  cor- 
responds to  our  Nadir.  When  it  rises  from  their 
Eastern  horizon,  which  is  our  descendant,  through 
the  sixth,  fifth  and  fourth  houses,  it  is  called  ori- 
ental, and  when  it  gradually  sets  towards  their 
Western  Horizon,  which  is  our  Ascendant,  it  is  called 
occidental. 

Therefore,  planets  in  the  twelfth,  eleventh,  tenth, 
sixth,  fifth,  and  fourth  houses  are  called  oriental, 
and  the  planets  in  the  other  six  houses  are  called  occi- 
dental or  Western. 
Opposition : 

When  two  planets  are  in  the  same  degree  of  op- 
posite signs,  they  are  said  to  be  in  '  Opposition. '  See 
'Aspect'  and  'Orb.' 

Orb: 

Planets  form  aspects  which  influence  human  af- 
fairs when  they  are  in  the  same  degree  of  the  Zodiac, 
or  a  certain  number  of  degrees  apart.  But  it  has 
been  found  that  the  influence  is  felt  even  when  plan- 
ets are  not  exactly  the  required  number  of  degrees 


146  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

apart.  Thus  a  planet  has  a  subtle  sphere  which 
makes  it  effective  before  an  exact  aspect  is  formed, 
and  after  it  has  been  dissolved,  and  this  is  called  its 
orb. 

Orbit :       The  path  of  a  planet  around  the  Sun. 
Orbital  Revolution : 

The  revolution  of  a  planet  in  its  orbit  around  the 
Sun.  The  time  occupied  by  the  orbital  revolutions 
of  all  the  planets  is  given  on  page  7. 
Oriental : 

Eastern,  see  'Occidental'  for  explanation. 
Parallel : 

The  aspect  formed  between  two  planets  when  they 
are  in  the  same  degree  of  declination,  either  North  or 
South  of  the  celestial  equator.    See  page  75. 
Part  of  Fortune : 

A  point  in  the  horoscope  which  opposes  or  fav- 
ors the  financial  fortunes  according  to  the  aspects  it 
receives  from  the  planets.  The  philosophy  and  the 
method  of  calculating  it  are  given  on  page  60  etc. 
To  prove  whether  the  'Part  of  Fortune'  is  rightly 
calculated,  observe  whether  the  distance  from  the 
Sun  to  the  Moon  equals  the  distance  from  the  Ascen- 
dant to  the  'Part  of  Fortune.' 
Physical  Appearance'. 

The  physical  type  is  determined  by  four  principal 
factors.     These  are  the  Ascendant  or  Rising  Sign, 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     147 

which  represents  the  body,  the  Lord  of  the  Ascen- 
dant, Rising  Planets,  namely  planets  in  the  first 
house,  particularly  when  they  are  in  the  sign  on  its 
cusp,  and  the  Sign  containing  the  Sun.  Note  how- 
ever, that  the  Sun  must  have  some  strength  in  the 
matters  of  position  and  aspects  in  order  to  bring  into 
evidence  the  physical  characteristics  of  its  sign.  The 
above  elements  are  arranged  in  the  usual  order  of  their 
importance.  Their  blending  determines  whether  a 
person  be  tall  or  short,  dark  or  fair,  and  all  his  other 
physical  peculiarities.  See  "Me.ssage  of  the  Stars" 
for  a  more  detailed  explanation  of  this  matter. 

Planets : 

The  heavenly  bodies  of  God's  Ambassadors  which 
circle  about  the  Sun. 

As  man  is  made  in  the  image  of  God,  who  is  three- 
fold in  manifestation,  so  astrologically,  the  higher 
self  in  man  is  represented  by  a  circle  with  the  cen- 
tral point  denoting  the  highest  spiritual  aspect,  the 
Divine  Spirit  whose  faculty  is  Will.  Therefore,  the 
Sun  stands  in  the  horoscope  as  the  highest  expression 
of  the  individual  self.  It  denotes  the  positive  out- 
going influence  in  man,  his  character  in  the  highest 
sense  of  the  word. 

The  symbol  of  the  planet  Venus  is  a  circle  above 
the  cross.  It  denotes  wisdom  which  is  not  mere  in- 
tellectuality, but  Intuition  and  Imagination.  Hence, 
the  nature  of  Venus  is  essentially  love,  and  it  is  the 


148  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

cementing  influence  in  the  life  whereby  we  are  at- 
tracted to  others  for  mutual  benefit ;  although  Venus 
in  and  of  herself  is  not  concerned  with  mutual  bene- 
fit, it  being  her  nature  to  attract  others,  and  that 
good  comes  by  her  is  only  an  incident. 

The  planet  Jupiter  is  symbolized  by  the  half -cir- 
cle above  the  crosa  It  denotes  the  human  spirit, 
whose  faculty  is  abstract  thought.  Therefore,  the 
planet  Jupiter  stands  for  the  higher  mind,  the  mind 
that  is  unconcerned  with  material  things,  and  ex- 
presses itself  in  abstract  thought,  as  religion,  phil- 
osophy and  the  higher  sciences. 

Mars  is  the  opposite  of  Venus.  It  is  symbolized 
by  the  cross  above  the  circle,  so  that  while  it  is  Ven- 
us's  nature  to  unselfishly  love,  and  to  give  to  others, 
it  is  the  nature  of  Mars  to  desire  for  selfish  ends.  It 
therefore  denotes  all  the  outgoing  energy  of  the  low- 
er nature,  the  desire  body,  the  passional  and  emotion- 
al aspect  of  man,  which  causes  him  to  work  outwards 
in  the  world,  to  overcome  obstacles  and  to  gather  ex- 
perience. 

Saturn  is  the  opposite  of  Jupiter,  the  cross  of 
matter  above  the  half-circle  denoting  the  brain  mind. 
It  is  that  which  gives  persistence  to  the  impulses  of 
Mars,  and  symbolizes  the  relatively  permanent  part 
of  the  lower  nature,  that  which  has  been  weighed  and 
found  to  be  of  use.  It  is,  therefore,  symbolical  of 
the  seed-atoms  of  Man's  lower  vehicles,  wherein  are 
stored  the  experiences  of  all  past  lives.  Hence,  Sat- 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     149 

urn  denotes  the  mechanical  ability,  the  chastity  and 
justice;  the  perseverance  and  material  attainments 
which  have  been  made  into  virtues  through  his  purg- 
ing influence.  He  stands  as  the  reaper  of  the  things 
that  have  been  sown  in  the  body,  and  as  such  he  ap- 
pears often  in  the  life  to  chastise  us  for  the  wrong  we 
have  done;  not  vandalistically,  but  in  order  that  we 
may  learn  the  lessons  of  how  to  act  rightly. 

The  Moon  is  the  reflection  of  the  Sun.  That  to- 
gether with  the  Ascendant,  denotes  the  formation  of 
the  physical  body,  the  Moon  being  particularly  the 
symbol  of  the  vital  body,  and  the  Ascendant  the  sig- 
nificator  of  the  dense  body.  Hence,  these  two  stand 
for  that  which  is  man's  tool  in  action;  the  most  per- 
fect part  of  his  nature,  but  at  the  same  time,  the 
most  evanescent.  The  Moon  is,  therefore,  the  very 
antithesis  of  the  Sun.  The  latter  is  a  fixed  star, 
while  the  Moon  is  the  most  migratory  of  the  heavenly 
bodies. 

The  three  last  named  planets  are  the  significa- 
tors  of  the  lower  nature  in  man,  the  personality,  as 
opposed  to  the  individuality,  symbolized  by  the  three 
first  named  planets;  and  these  two  triangles  are  con- 
nected by  the  planet  signifying  the  lower  concrete 
mind,  namely  Mercury.  The  symbol  of  that  planet 
has  in  it  all  three  constituents  of  planetary  symbol- 
ism, the  circle,  the  half-circle  and  the  cross,  showing 
it  to  have  no  nature  of  its  own,  but  to  be  a  vehicle 


150  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

for  the  expression  of  the  other  planets.  When  Mer- 
cury is  well  posited  with  reference  to  Venus,  we  have 
the  artistic,  poetical,  musical  and  literary  type  of 
mind.  For  it  is  from  Venus  that  the  vibrations  come 
which  express  themselves  in  all  art. 

When  Mercury  is  well  placed  in  relation  to  Jup- 
iter, we  have  the  philosophical  and  scientific  mind, 
the  ruler  and  the  law-giver,  both  in  church  and  state, 
who  works  for  the  good  of  all. 

When  Mercury  is  well  posited  with  regard  to 
Mars,  we  have  the  man  of  action ;  the  man  who  aims 
at  the  material  development  of  the  world's  resources 
in  a  small  or  large  way,  as  a  shopkeeper,  .storekeeper 
and  all  other  ways  wherein  others  are  exploited  for 
personal  benefit,  for  Mars  is,  as  already  said,  the  an- 
tithesis of  Venus,  and  the  embodiment  of  selfish  de- 
sire. 

Mercury  in  aspect  to  the  Moon  has  no  signific- 
ance, as  the  Moon  itself  is  a  reflector;  except  where 
it  is  an  evil  aspect  coming  from  a  cardinal  sign  or 
elevation.  There  it  is  apt  to  produce  insanity. 

In  the  foregoing,  only  the  essential  natures  of  the 
planets  have  been  given.  Where  they  are  well  as- 
pected  by  another  planet  these  natural  characterist- 
ics are  enhanced  so  far  as  the  benefic  planets  are  con- 
cerned, but  when  evilly  aspected,  the  nature  of  Ven- 
us, which  is  wisdom,  love  and  rhythm,  will  become 
folly,  licentiousness,  and  sloth;  the  philosophy,  law- 
abiding  tendencies,  mercy  and  lofty  aspirations  of 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     151 

Jupiter  will  turn  into  lawlessness,  disregard  of 
others,  and  low  pursuits;  the  lofty  spirituality  of 
the  Sun  will  express  itself  as  just  animal  spirits  and 
physical  health.  In  regard  to  the  planets  of  the  low- 
er nature,  good  aspects  to  Mars  turn  the  desires  to- 
wards constructive  objects  and  well  regulated  activ- 
ities, while  the  evil  aspects  are  responsible  for  the 
destructive  expression  of  the  desire  nature.  Saturn, 
when  well  aspected,  gives  the  mechanical  and  execu- 
tive ability  that  is  capable  of  directing  the  desire 
nature.  It  shows  the  brainy,  persevering  man  who 
is  able  to  cope  with  and  conquer  material  obstacles; 
the  organizer  and  promoter;  the  scientific  investiga- 
tor, who  follows  along  material  lines.  As  it  is  the 
antithesis  of  Jupiter,  it  will  be  readily  seen  that  as 
Jupiter,  well  aspected,  denotes  the  high-minded  phil- 
osopher, the  worthy  law-giver,  the  sincere  and  ardent 
priest,  in  fact,  all  who  have  high  and  lofty  aspira- 
tions, so  Saturn,  when  evilly  aspected,  denotes  the 
narrow-minded,  creed-bound  sectarian,  the  material- 
ist, the  anarchist,  and  the  enemy  of  society,  whether 
of  the  church  or  state.  As  Jupiter  gives  the  lofty, 
expansive  and  benevolent  mind,  so  Saturn,  evilly  as- 
pected, gives  the  sarcastic,  concrete  and  narrow  ten- 
dencies. 

Uranus:  Besides  the  seven  planets  already  men- 
tioned, two  others  are  in  our  system,  Uranus  and 
Neptune.  Uranus  may  be  said  to  be  the  octave  of 


152  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Venus,  having  her  nature  in  a  much  more  subtle  de- 
gree; its  attractions  are  so  spiritual  that  they  can- 
not be  felt  by  the  ordinary  man  in  the  proper  man- 
ner, and  he  therefore,  more  readily  responds  to  the 
evil  side  of  Uranus.  It  is  the  planet  which  rules  the 
ether,  and  when  in  aspect!  to  Mercury,  or  in  the  As- 
cendant, or  with  the  Moon,  it  produces  a  touch  with 
the  force  we  know  as  electricity.  Its  operations  are 
always  very  sudden,  and  as  mankind  responds  to  its 
evil  side,  as  already  stated,  these  effects  show  them- 
selves particularly  in  the  form  of  disaster. 

Neptune  is  the  octave  of  Mercury.  As  Mercury 
is  the  light-bearer  for  the  physical  Sun,  so  is  Nep- 
tune the  Iigh1>bearer  of  the  spiritual  Sun,  called  Vul- 
can among  occultists,  which  is  seen  back  of  the  vis- 
ible Sun.  Naturally,  therefore,  still  fewer  among 
humanity  are  capable  at  all  of  being  affected  by  it, 
save  that  it  produces  a  chaotic  state  of  mind  when 
placed  in  evil  aspect.  When  placed  in  angles,  and 
particularly  in  elevations  near  the  Midheaven,  it  pro- 
duces Occultists  and  Mystics  of  the  highest  stamp; 
but  when  placed  in  cadent  houses,  it  brings  medium- 
ship  at  best,  and  often  insanity.  It  is  the  highest 
string  in  the  lyre  of  the  soul  of  God,  and  is  therefore 
the  least  used,  and  the  one  to  get  most  easily  out  of 
tune.  Astrologers  are  the  most  affected  by  it,  and 
those  musicians  who  use  stringed  instruments. 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     153 

Planetary  Hours: 

That  the  planets  have  dominion  over  the  days  of 
the  week  which  represent  the  seven  creative  days, 
(Periods)  is  taught  by  the  Rosicrucians. 

Saturday  is  Saturn's  day  and  corresponds  to  the 
Saturn  Period. 

Sunday  is  the  Sun's  day  and  corresponds  to  the 
Sun  Period. 

Monday  is  the  Moon's  day  and  corresponds  to  the 
Moon  Period. 

Tuesday  is  the  day  of  the  Norse  war-god,  Tyr,  and 
corresponds  to  the  Mars-half  of  the  Earth  Period. 

"Wednesday  is  the  day  of  the  Norse  Mercury, 
Wotan,  and  corresponds  to  the  Mercury-half  of  the 
Earth  Period. 

Thursday  is  the  day  of  Thor,  the  Norse  Jupiter, 
and  corresponds  to  the  Jupiter  Period. 

Friday  is  the  day  of  the  Norse  Venus,  Freia,  and 
corresponds  to  the  Venus  Period. 

In  addition  to  the  rulership  over  the  days  of  the 
week,  the  planets  have  dominion  in  turn  over  the 
hours  of  the  day,  and  the  underlying  system,  order 
and  connection  between  the  rulership  of  the  days 
and  hours  become  apparent  when  it  is  noted  that: 

The  planet  for  which  any  day  is  named  rules  the 
first  hour  after  sunrise  on  that  day. 


154  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Starting  with  the  hour  of  sunrise  on  Sunday 
which  is  ruled  by  the  Sun,  the  next  hour  is  allotted 
to  Venus,  the  third  to  Mercury.  Next  come  the 
hours  of  the  Moon,  Saturn,  Jupiter,  Mars.  Then 
come  other  hours  ruled  by  the  Sun,  by  Venus  and 
all  the  other  planets  in  the  order  given:  Sun,  Ven- 
us, Mercury,  Moon,  Saturn,  Jupiter,  Mars.  This 
succession  is  followed  in  unbroken  sequence  to  the 
next  Sunday  morning  when  Mars  rules  the  last  hour 
of  the  week  in  his  proper  order  and  the  Sun  opens 
the  new  week  with  his  beneficient  ray. 

Under  thia  arrangement  of  succession  started  at 
sunrise  on  Sunday,  the  Moon  rules  the  first  hour  of 
Monday,  which  is  the  twenty-fifth  from  the  hour  of 
the  Sun  which  ruled  Sunday  morning. 

Mars  rules  the  first  hour  on  Tuesday  which  is  the 
twenty-fifth  hour  from  the  hour  of  the  Moon  which 
ruled  Monday  morning. 

And  so  on,  through  the  other  days  of  the  week. 
This  shows  how  the  method  of  naming  the  days  for 
the  Planetary  Spirits  which  have  dominion  over 
them,  dovetails  with  the  system  of  planetary  hours, 
and  both  are  rooted  in  a  foundation  of  esoteric  know- 
ledge. 

When  we  speak  of  planetary  'Tiours,'  it  must  be 
understood  that  these  hours  are  not  sixty  minutes  in 
length,  but  vary  in  a  wide  measure,  with  the  time  of 
the  year,  and  the  place  of  your  residence.  Near  the 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY      155 

equator  the  divergence  is  least;  and  it  increases  the 
further  North  we  go  because  a  planetary  hour  is  one 
twelfth  part  of  the  time  between  Sunset  on  a  par- 
ticular day  and  Sunrise  the  next  morning,  or  it  is 
one  twelfth  part  of  a  particular  day  beginning  at 
Sunrise  and  ending  at  Sunset. 

At  the  equinoxes  when  the  day  and  night  are  of 
equal  length,  the  planetary  hours  are  also  sixty  min- 
utes each,  but  at  midsummer  and  in  latitude  sixty 
where  the  Sun  rises  at  3  A.  M.  and  sets  at  8  P.  M.  giv- 
ing a  day  of  seventeen  and  a  night  of  only  seven 
hours,  the  planetary  hours  of  the  day  are  ninety-two 
minutes  long  against  twenty-seven  minutes  for  the 
night  hours.  This  is  reversed  in  December,  for  then 
the  Sun  does  not  rise  till  9 :15  A.  M.  in  latitude  sixty 
North  and  it  sets  at  2 :45  P.  M.  with  the  result  that 
the  planetary  hours  of  the  day  are  twenty-seven  min- 
utes long,  and  the  night  hours  ninety-two  minutes. 

For  the  convenience  of  students  we  give  in  the 
back  of  this  book  six  tables,  each  usable  for  two 
months  in  the  year  by  all  who  live  in  latitude  25  to  55 
North  or  South,  this  being  practically  the  whole 
civilized  world.  They  are  perpetual  and  may  be 
used  a  lifetime. 

To  find  which  planet  rules  a  certain  hour,  look  at 
your  timepiece  and  consult  the  table  for  the  current 
month.  Bun  your  index-finger  down  the  column  for 
the  latitude  in  which  you  live.  Stop  when  you  come 


156  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

to  the  first  time  which  is  LATER  than  the  time  indi- 
cated by  your  watch.  Move  up  one  step.  The  fig- 
ure found  there  indicate/3  that  the  planetary  ruler 
commenced  to  rule  at  that  time  and  will  continue  in 
power  till  the  time  at  which  you  first  stopped. 

The  Hour-rulers  are  found  at  the  intersection  of 
the  line  containing  the  time  at  which  they  commenc- 
ed to  rule  and  the  column  of  the  proper  day  of  the 
week. 

To  illustrate,  if  we  want  to  find  which  planet 
rules  in  latitude  40  on  Thursday  at  2  P.  M.  during 
December,  we  run  our  index  finger  down  the  middle 
column  of  latitudes  in  the  table  for  December,  and 
stop  at  2:18  P.  M.,  which  is  the  first  figure  that  is 
later  than  we  desire.  We  then  move  up  a  step  to 
1:32  P.  M.,  and  thence  to  the  right  stopping  at  the 
column  of  Thursday.  There  we  find  Mars,  and  know 
that  that  planet  rules  from  1:32  to  2:18  P.  M.  on 
Thursdays,  during  December  and  January,  in  lati- 
tudes 35  to  45. 

Regarding  the  use  of  the  planetary  hours,  any- 
one who  has  studied  the  nature  and  influence  of  the 
various  planets  on  the  affairs  of  life  may  readily 
form  an  opinion.  Experiment  and  observation  will 
soon  make  anyone  proficient  in  the  choice  of  the  best 
(times  for  doing  the  thing  desired  with  the  best 
chance  of  success.  There  are  many  who  drag  the 
stars  into  the  gutter  by  perverted  use  of  their  influ- 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     157 

ence  for  selfish  ends,  and  endeavor  to  obtain  an  undue 
advantage  thereby,  but  students  of  our  literature 
will  not  expect  to  find  advice  on  how  to  proceed  with 
such  a  purpose.  We  have  not  studied  the  matter 
from  that  angle  and  would  not  teach  others  how,  if 
we  knew.  But  on  certain  occasions  the  planetary 
hours  may  be  justly  and  beneficently  used,  and  we 
shall  try  to  indicate  how  they  may  be  of  service. 

Suppose  we  want  to  help  a  friend  to  obtain  em- 
ployment, and  know  a  place  where  he  would  fit  in. 
We  remember  that  the  Sun  is  a  significator  of  those  in 
authority  and  therefore  the  hours  of  the  Sun  are 
good  in  which  to  transact  business  with  and  ask 
favors  of  such  people;  and  you  will  have  the  best 
chance  of  success  if  you  apply  at  those  times. 

But  it  also  is  important  to  remember  that  the 
planet  which  rules  the  first  hour  of  a  given  day  has 
prime  ruler  ship  during  that  entire  day,  and  that  the 
other  planets  are  only  subsidiary  rulers  with  the  day 
ruler.  They  are  weakened  or  strengthened  in  pro- 
portion to  the  agreement  or  disagreement  of  their 
natures  with  the  nature  of  the  day-ruler.  Thus  if 
you  select  a  Sun-hour  on  Saturday,  which  is  tinged 
with  the  obstructive  Saturnine  influence,  your  chanc- 
es of  success  are  not  nearly  as  good  as  if  you  select  a 
Sun-hour  on  a  Thursday,  which  is  tinged  throughout 
with  the  benevolent  ray  of  its  day-ruler,  Jupiter. 

Or,  if  you  have  occasion  as  a  matter  of  duty,  t(J 
reason  with  someone  who  has  a  very  short  temper, 


158  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

who,  you  know,  is  apt  to  resent  it  and  say  or  do  some- 
thing that  you  will  both  wish  to  avoid,  use  the  cold 
wet  blanket  of  the  Saturn-hour  on  Saturn's  day  if 
possible,  to  put  down  and  quench  the  martial  spirit. 
The  danger  of  a  rupture  will  then  be  minimized  to 
a  wonderful  extent,  and  you  will  probably  both  won- 
der with  pleasant  retrospection  how  well  it  went  off. 

Or,  if  it  becomes  necessary  to  stir  someone  who 
has  fallen  into  habits  of  idleness  wheref rom  others 
are  made  to  suffer,  if  it  seems  almost  necessary  to 
build  a  fire  under  him  to  make  him  move,  compound 
the  fire  and  energy  of  Mars  as  a  day-ruler  with  his 
influence  as  an  hour-ruler,  by  talking  to  him  on  Tues- 
day. He  will  heed  then  if  it  is  at  all  possible  to  get 
him  .started. 

By  using  the  planetary  hours  on  the  lines  here 
laid  down,  for  the  purpose  of  unselfish  service,  you 
may  confer  a  great  many  blessings  on  others  and  lay 
up  much  treasure  for  yourself  in  heaven  where  nei- 
ther moth  nor  rust  will  corrupt ;  and  it  is  well  worth 
remembering  that  however  much  material  advantage 
you  may  gain  by  using  such  knowledge,  that  material 
gain,  power,  position,  money  and  all  other  things 
that  pertain  to  this  world  are  left  behind  when  death 
calls,  and  that  our  good  deeds  alone  stand  by  us  in 
that  hour.  Therefore  do  not  scoff,  but  if  you  want 
to  use  these  stellar  influences,  use  them  so  that  they 
will  bring  you  everlasting  instead  of  only  temporary 
gain. 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     159 

Pleiades:    See  'Fixed  Stars.' 
Precession : 

A  backward  movement  of  the  vernal  equinox, 
which  is  a  very  important  factor  in  human  affairs. 
See  'Intellectual  Zodiac.' 

Progression:    See  'Directions  and  Transits.' 
Primary  Directions:     See  'Directions  and  Transits.' 

Radical : 

Pertaining  to  the  horoscope  at  birth.  See  'Transits.' 

Radix:    The  horoscope  at  birth.    See 'Transits.' 

Reception : 

Planets  are  in  'mutual  reception'  when  each  occu- 
pies the  house  ruled  by  the  other ;  as  Venus  in  Aries 
and  Mars  in  Taurus.  The  effect  depends  on  the  agree- 
ment between  the  natures  of  the  planets.  When  Mars 
is  in  the  Mercurial  signs  Gemini  or  Virgo  andMercury 
in  the  Martial  signs  Aries  or  Scorpio,  the  dynamic 
energy  of  Mars  is  infused  into  the  mental  organiza- 
tion of  that  person  who  on  that  account  becomes  more 
alert  mentally.  Whether  this  alertness  manifests 
erratically  or  along  orderly  lines  depends  upon  the 
aspects  of  course;  all  the  'mutual  reception'  does  is 
to  give  the  energy.  If  Saturn  is  in  the  Mercurial 
signs  Gemini  or  Virgo,  and  Mercury  in  the  Saturnine 

signs  Capricorn  or  Aquarius,  the  restraining  hand  of 
11 


160  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Saturn  is  laid  upon  the  flighty  Mercury  with  the  re- 
sult that  the  mind  gains  in  depth  and  power  of  con- 
centration, but  whether  this  mental  capacity  will  be 
used  for  good  or  ill,  depends  on  the  aspects  the  same 
as  in  the  case  of  Mars.  When  Venus  and  Jupiter  are 
in  'mutual  reception'  and  well  aspected,  it  smooths 
the  path  of  life  most  wonderfully.  Everywhere  the 
person  who  has  this  configuration  will  find  people 
ready  to  help,  and  many  friends,  but  conversely, 
when  Saturn  and  Mars  are  in  'mutual  reception'  and 
afflicted,  he  who  is  so  unfortunate  will  meet  rebuff 
and  enmity  on  every  hand. 

It  should  never  be  forgotten,  however,  that  our 
horoscope  shows  what  we  have  made  of  ourselves  in 
past  lives.,  and  he  who  has  the  configuration  that  at- 
tracts friends  must  have  been  kind  and  obliging, 
while  he  who  draws  out  the  mean  side  of  human 
nature  and  makes  enemies  is  himself  selfish  and  un- 
friendly. But  if  he  will  strive  to  turn  from  his  ways 
and  make  some  sacrifice  for  others,  he  will  also  in 
time  overcome  the  undesirable  aspects,  for  the  Star 
Angels  are  not  maliciously  bent  upon  scourging  any- 
one. They  only  scourge  to  subdue  and  correct  our 
faults  and  make  us  better.  Sometime  we  shall  all 
be  loving  and  lovable,  and  then  there  will  be  for  us 
no  malefic  influence. 

Retrogradation : 

See  chapter  on  Retrogradation  and  its  effects  p  72. 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY          161 

Right  Ascension:    See  'Ascension.' 

Ruler : 

The  Ruler  of  a  horoscope  is  that  planet  which  has 
greatest  dominion  and  influence  over  the  life,  and  to 
which  the  native  most  readily  responds. 

Other  things  being  equal,  the  Lord  of  the  Ascend- 
ant is  the  Ruler.  But  if  another  planet  is  stronger 
in  the  matters  of  Elevation,  Dignity  or  Exaltation, 
Position  in  an  Angle,  and  Aspects,  then  that  planet 
must  be  regarded  as  the  Ruler.  But  for  this  to  hold, 
the  aspects  must  be  close  and  strong,  regardless  of 
whether  they  are  good  or  bad.  Good  aspects  will 
make  a  good  Ruler,  bad  aspects  a  bad  one,  and  with- 
out affecting  the  fact  of  rulership  in  either  case. 
When  two  planets  are  about  equal  in  strength  and 
position,  they  must  be  classed  as  co-rulers. 

In  the  case  of  a  House,  the  Lord  of  the  sign  on, 
the  cusp  is  its  Ruler.  Where  there  is  an  intercept- 
ed sign,  its  Lord  has  also  partial  rulership  over  the 
house,  although  it  is  inferior  in  this  respect  to  the 
planet  which  rules  the  sign  on  the  cusp.  This  ruler- 
ship  of  an  intercepted  sign  is  latent  and  is  not 
brought  out  until  by  progression  of  the  angles  the  in- 
tercepted sign  arrives  at  the  cusp  of  the  house. 
Planets  in  a  house,  if  aspected,  will  ordinarily  have 
a  greater  influence  upon  its  affairs  (than  the  rulers 
of  the  signs  before  mentioned.  In  this  case,  such 
planets  may  be  termed  co-rulers  of  the  house. 


162  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Secondary  Directions: 

See  'Directions  and  Transits.' 

Separating : 

When  a  planet  which  has  been  in  aspect  with 
another  moves  onward  and  thus  dissolves  the  aspect, 
it  is  said  to  be  separating  from  that  aspect.  See 
'Apply.' 

Sextile : 

When  two  planets  are  sixty  degrees  apart  they  are 
said  to  be  in  sextile,  so  called  because  sixty  degrees 
are  one  sixth  part  of  the  circle  which  has  360  degrees. 
It  is  considered  a  'good'  aspect.  See  'Good'  and 
'Bad,'  also  'Aspect.' 

Short  Ascension:     See  'Ascension.' 

Sidereal  Day: 

Is  the  time  which  elapses  between  two  successive 
passages  of  a  fixed  star  over  the  meridian  of  a  given 
place.  See  chapter  on  'Time'  p  18. 

Sidereal  Tear: 

Is  the  period  of  time  which  elapses  between  a 
conjunction  of  the  Sun  with  any  fixed  star  and  its  re- 
turn again  to  the  same  conjunction. 

Significator : 

The  Planets,  Ascendant,  Midheaven,  Part  of  For- 
tune and  tthe  Dragon's  Head  and  Tall  are  called 
'Significators,'  because  their  places  and  aspects  in 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY          163 

the  horoscope  have  a  certain  significant  bearing  upon 
the  affairs  of  life. 

Signs : 

The  signs  of  the  Zodiac  are  divisions  of  the  heav- 
ens beginning  at  the  vernal  equinox.  The  first  thirty 
degrees  are  called  Aries,  the  next  Taurus,  Gemini, 
Cancer,  Leo,  Virgo,  Libra,  Scorpio,  Sagittarius, 
Capricorn,  Aquarius  and  Pisces. 

These  signs  are,  as  said,  measured  from  the  vernal 
equinox,  a  fluctuating  point,  and  are  not  to  be  con- 
fused with  the  twelve  constellations  of  fixed  stars 
which  bear  the  same  names,  nor  with  the  twelve 
houses  of  the  horoscope  which  are  divisions  of  the 
earth.  See  'Intellectual  Zodiac'  and  'Houses.' 

Solar  Day : 

Is  the  time  which  elapses  between  two  successive 
passages  of  the  Sun  over  the  meridian  of  a  given 
place.  See  chapter  on  'Time'  p  18. 

Solstice : 

This  word  is  compounded  of  the  two  words,  'sol,' 
the  Sun,  and  '  sistere, '  to  make  to  stand ;  thus  under- 
stood, it  describes  nicely  what  happens  at  the  solstice, 
for  a  solstice  is  a  point  at  which  the  Sun  is  in  its 
highest  point  of  declination  and  furthest  from  the 
celestial  equator.  There  it  stands  or  remains  for 
three  days  in  the  twenty-third  degree  of  declination 
before  it  begins  to  descend  towards  its  node. 


164  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

There  are  two  solstices.  One  in  midsummer,  the 
21st  of  June,  which  is  the  longest  day  in  the  year, 
another  on  the  21st  of  December,  which  is  the  short- 
est. They  are  called  respectively,  the  summer  and 
the  winter  solstice. 

Southern  Signs: 

Libra,  Scorpio,  Sagittarius,  Capricorn,  Aquarius 
and  Pisces  are  called  Southern  Signs  because  when 
the  Sun  is  in  them,  he  is  South  of  the  celestial  equa- 
tor, and  as  a  result  we  in  the  Northern  hemisphere 
have  winter. 

Square : 

When  two  planets  are  ninety  degrees  apart  they 
are  said  to  be  in  square  or  quartile,  because  ninety 
degrees  are  one-fourth,  or  quarter  of  the  circle.  This 
aspect  is  said  to  be  'bad,'  the  planetary  rays  striking 
each  other  at  a  right  angle,  and  therefore  being  at 
'cross'  purposes  as  it  were.  See  ' Aspects, '  and  'Good 
and  Bad.' 

Stationary : 

At  times  planets  move  obliquely  with  reference 
to  the  earth's  orbit,  in  such  a  manner  as  to  appear 
stationary,  though,  as  a  matter  of  fact  they  are  al- 
ways moving.  See  chapter  on  'Retrogradation'  p  72. 

Succedent  Houses: 

The  second,  fifth,  eighth  and  eleventh  houses  are 
called  succedent,  because  they  'succeed'  or  follow  the 
'Angles.' 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY      165 

Superior  Planets: 

Mars,  Jupiter,  Saturn,  Uranus  and  Neptune,  are 
so  called  by  Astronomers  because  they  move  in  orbits 
which  take  them  to  parts  of  the  heavens  far  from 
the  Sun.  The  term  is  used  in  contradistinction  to 
that  of  'inferior  planets'  as  applied  to  Venus  and 
Mercury  which  always  remain  near  the  Sun.  See 
page  10. 

Symbols : 

The  symbols  of  the  planets  are  given  on  page  24, 
and  it  will  be  noticed  that  they  consist  of  a  circle,  a 
half  circle  and  a  cross  variously  grouped.  The  circle 
is  the  symbol  of  the  spirit,  the  half -circle  is  the  em- 
blem of  the  soul,  and  the  cross  represents  matter. 
Thus  the  elements  of  the  human  constitution,  Spirit, 
Soul  and  Body  are  enfolded  in  the  component  parts 
of  the  planetary  symbols  to  show  to  the  Mystic  their 
mission  with  respect  to  humanity.  These  elementary 
parts  are  variously  grouped  to  indicate  the  nature 
of  the  planet  for  which  they  stand,  and  its  office  in 
the  Great  School  of  Life  where  God  lias  placed  us 
under  the  Planetary  Spirits  who  are  endeavoring  to 
educate  us  in  the  Divine  "Wisdom. 

The  Sun,  as  its  symbol  indicates  is  the  centre  of 
all  spiritual  faculties,  the  fountain  of  all  life. 

The  Moon's  symbol  is  a  half -circle,  showing  that 
we  have  completed  the  arc  of  involution  where  bodies 
were  built,  and  that  now  the  essence  of  experience 


166  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

extracted  from  these  vehicles  must  be  transmuted  in- 
to spiritual  qualities  by  the  alchemy  of  soul-growth, 
so  that  we  may  rise  on  the  arc  of  evolution. 

Mars'  symbol  is  a  icross  above  the  circle,  showing 
the  unregenerate  man,  where  the  cross  of  personality 
is  above  the  circle  of  spirit.  But  by  trampling  the 
higher  nature  under  foot  the  martial  character  en-» 
genders  war  and  strife,  during  which  he  necessarily 
suffers  even  when  he  is  victorious.  Thus,  by  rebuffs 
the  nature  is  gradually  softened. 

Venus:  When  the  martial  nature  has  suffered 
sufficiently,  the  spirit  circle  gradually  ascends  above 
the  cross  of  the  personality  and  thus  becomes  the 
symbol  of  Venus,  the  planet  of  love. 

Saturn  and  Jupiter  have  symbols  which  are  simi- 
larly indicative  of  the  manner  in  which  soul-growth 
is  fostered.  In  the  symbol  of  Saturn  the  cross  of 
personality  is  exalted  above  the  signature  of  the  soul, 
the  half-circle.  Soul-growth  is  attained  by  Service, 
but  the  symbol  of  Saturn  shows  plainly  that  the  per- 
son under  his  rule  is  more  ready  to  be  served  than 
to  serve,  and  is  selfish  and  obstructive  of  the  common 
good.  Naturally  others  resent  this  trait  of  character, 
and  therefore  Saturn  brings  sorrow,  trouble,  worry 
and  disappointment  in  order  to  teach  us  that  we  can 
never  really  serve  ourselves  by  selfishness,  but  only 
by  sacrifice. 

Jupiter:  When  it  has  gradually  dawned  upon  us 
through  much  sorrow,  that  selfishness  is  as  a  shell 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     167 


around  the  soul  which  shuts  us  off  from  others,  we 
begin  slowly  to  cultivate  the  quality  of  benevolence, 
and  gradually  the  half -circle  of  the  soul  rises  above 
the  cross  of  matter  and  becomes  the  symbol  of  Jupi- 
ter, the  philanthropist  and  friend  of  man.  It  then 
signifies  one  who  loves  all  and  one  who  is  equally  the 
favorite  of  gods  and  men. 

Mercury:  Though  the  least  in  the  Kingdom  of 
God,  the  Solar  System,  it  is  nevertheless  of  the  great- 
est importance,  on  account  of  its  influence  upon  body, 
soul  and  spirit,  which  is  shown  by  the  fact  that  its 
symbol  contains  all  the  component  parts  of  the  plan- 
etary symbolism,  namely,  the  circle,  half-circle  and 
cross.  This  is  because  in  the  mind  all  are  linked  to- 
gether in  one  whole  physico-spiritual  organism  called 
MAN.  Without  Mercury  this  could  not  be. 

Mercury  is  neutral  however,  and  it  depends  upon 
the  indwelling  Ego  represented  by  the  centrally  plac- 
ed circle  whether  it  will  use  its  divine  attributes  of 
choice  and  free-will  to  aspire  heavenward  for  soul- 
growth  as  symbolized  by  the  signature  of  the  soul, 
the  half -circle,  placed  above  the  circle  of  spirit,  or 
whether  it  will  stoop  towards  the  cross  of  personality 
Below  the  circle  and  wallow  in  the  mire  of  worldli- 
ness.  No  creature  has  such  divine  possibilities  as 
man,  none  may  aspire  higher,  and  conversely,  none 
may  fall  lower.  This  struggle  between  the  higher  and 
the  lower  natures  for  mastery,  symbolized  by  the  half- 


168  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

circle  and  the  cross  which  are  placed  above  and  below 
the  circle  in  the  symbol  of  Mercury,  was  well  voiced 
by  Goethe   in  the   lines    of  his    immortal  "Faust" 
where  the  hero  says: 
"Thou  by  one  sole  impulse  art  posses 'd, 
Unconscious  of  the  other  still  remain. 
Two  souls  alas  are  housed  within  my  breast, 

And  struggle  there  for  undivided  reign. 
One  to  the  earth  with  passionate  desire, 

And  closely  clinging  organs  still  adheres, 
Above  the  mists  the  other  doth  aspire, 
With  sacred  ardor  unto  purer  spheres." 

Table  of  Houses: 

A  table  calculated  to  show  what  signs  and  degrees 
of  the  Zodiac  are  on  each  of  the  cusps  of  the  twelve 
mundane  houses  at  any  time  during  any  day  or  night 
in  the  year. 

A  table  of  houses  is  always  the  same  for  a 
certain  degree  of  latitude,  and  it  may  be  used  for  a 
lifetime  as  it  deals  with  the  fixed  stars  which  show 
no  appreciable  motion  in  a  hundred  years. 

Transits : 

At  the  moment  a  child  is  born  the  positions  of  the 
planets  show  the  tendencies  of  the  life.  Those  posi- 
tions constitute  the  'Radix,'  and  anything  that  has 
reference  to  that  'Root'  of  all  events  is  called  'radi- 
cal.' Thus,  'the  radical  Jupiter'  refers  to  the  posi- 
tion of  Jupiter  at  a  certain  person's  birth. 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     169 

During  the  next  twenty,  thirty  or  sixty  days  after 
birth  the  planets  move  on  and  make  certain  aspects 
to  the  positions  held  by  them  at  birth.  Each  of  these 
days  corresponds  to  a  year  of  life,  and  the  aspects 
formed  by  the  'progression'  on  the  twentieth  day 
after  birth  will  operate  to  bring  about  events  in  the 
twentieth  year.  The  aspects  formed  on  the  thirty- 
fifth  day  after  birth  will  determine  the  influences  in 
the  thirty-fifth  year  and  so  on.  These  are  called  '  pro- 
gressed' positions  and  aspects.  Thus,  if  someone  says 
"  my  progressed  Sun  will  be  trine  to  my  radical  Jupi- 
ter when  I  am  forty, ' '  he  means  that  forty  days  after 
his  birth  the  Sun  had  progressed  to  a  trine  aspect 
with  the  position  of  Jupiter  at  his  birth,  and  that 
therefore  this  will  operate  in  his  fortieth  year  to 
bring  about  events  of  a  fortunate  nature,  because 
the  aspect  and  the  planets  are  what  is  called  good. 

As  the  span  of  life  is  usually  not  more  than  seven- 
ty years,  the  planetary  positions  after  seventy  days 
from  birth  do  not  have  as  marked  an  effect  as  de- 
scribed in  the  foregoing  paragraph,  but  they  have 
nevertheless  an  appreciable  influence  on  the  lives  of 
mankind,  according  to  their  natures.  But  because 
of  the  rapid  transit  made,  the  effects  are  ephemeral, 
even  in  the  case  of  the  slower  planets.  These  move- 
ments of  the  planets  are  called  'Transits.' 

They  are  found  in  the  ephemeris  for  the  current 
year.  That  is  to  say,  if  you  want  to  know  what  plan- 
ets transit  the  different  houses  of  your  horoscope  in 


170  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

1916,  you  can  find  them  only  in  the  ephemeris  for 
that  year.  The  'radical'  and  'progressed'  planets 
are  all  in  the  ephemeris  for  the  year  you  were  born, 
but  the  'transits'  for  1920,  for  instance,  can  only  be 
found  in  the  ephemeris  for  1920. 

Lunations,  or  New  Moons,  and  eclipses  are  among 
the  mqst  important  transits.  Their  effect  is  describ- 
ed under  'lunations,'  which  see.  Next  in  importance 
are  the  transits  of  the  Superior  planets  through  the 
houses.  The  tenth  house  signifies  social  honor.  When 
Jupiter  transits  it  every  twelfth  year,  there  will  be 
opportunities  for  social  advancement;  when  Saturn 
comes  there  once  in  thirty  years,  look  out  for  setbacks 
and  exert  your  will  to  overcome  them ;  and  you  may 
judge  in  like  manner  about  the  other  planets  and 
houses. 

Trine : 

When  two  planets  are  120  degrees  apart,  they  are 
said  to  be  in  trine,  because  120  degrees  is  one  third 
part  of  a  circle.  This  is  considered  the  most  harmon- 
ious of  all  aspects. 

Triplicities : 

The  signs  of  the  Zodiac  are  variously  grouped  to 
show  certain  of  their  qualities.  One  method  segre- 
gates them  into  four  groups  of  three  signs  each,  each 
group  having  affinity  for  one  of  the  elements:  Thus 
Aries,  Leo  and  Sagittarius  are  fiery.  Taurus  Virgo 
and  Capricorn  are  earthy.  Gemini,  Libra  and  Aquar- 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY      171 

ius  are  airy,  and  Cancer,  Scorpio  and  Pisces  are 
watery.  These  four  groups  constitute  the  four  Tri- 
plicities. 

The  fiery  triplicity  has  its  apex  in  the  Eastern 
angle,  Aries,  where  the  creative  fire  commences  to 
produce  a  body  for  the  spirit  to  function  in  in  the 
material  world.  The  second  angle  of  this  trinity  is 
in  the  fifth  house,  which  denotes  the  manner  in  which 
the  creative  force  will  be  used  on  the  physical  plane 
for  procreation.  It  is,  therefore,  the  house  of  chil- 
dren, occupied  by  the  fiery  sign  Leo.  The  line  of 
force  running  from  the  Eastern  angle  in  the  other 
direction  shows  the  use  to  which  the  creative  force 
is  put  in  the  mind.  It  is,  therefore,  occupied  by  the 
fiery  sign  Sagittarius  and  placed  in  the  ninth  house, 
which  denotes  the  higher  mind. 

The  earthy  triangle  has  its  rise,  its  apex,  in  the 
cardinal  sign  Capricorn,  which  corresponds  to  the 
tenth  house,  denoting  the  external  environment,  the 
professional  and  social  standing  of  the  person;  and 
as  this  triplicity  is  earthy,  it  deals  entirely  with  the 
material  affairs  of  the  native.  Therefore,  one  line 
of  force  goes  from  it  to  the  sixth  house,  which  is  un- 
der Virgo,  a  business  sign;  hence  this  house  de- 
notes the  service  which  it  is  expected  that  the  person 
ghould  perform  in  the  world.  Since  this  service  is 
as  much  dependent  upon  bodily  health  as  mental 
capacity,  this  house  is  also  the  house  of  sickness.  The 
other  line  of  force,  proceeding  from  Capricorn  to  the 


172  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

third  sign  of  the  earthy  triplicity,  denotes  the  emolu- 
ments which  will  be  received  for  the  service  rendered 
according  to  the  sixth  house,  and  in  the  capacity  de- 
noted by  the  tenth  house.  Therefore  the  second  house 
ruled  by  the  sign  Taurus  is  the  house  of  finance ;  and 
as  one's  freedom  of  action  depends  to  a  degree  upon 
the  state  of  his  finances,  this  house  is  also  called  the 
House  of  Liberty. 

The  apex  of  the  airy  triplicity  is  in  the  Western 
angle  occupied  by  the  cardinal  sign  Libra,  which  is 
ruled  by  the  planet  of  love,  Venus.  This  triplicity 
is  therefore  concerned  with  the  different  unions  pos- 
sible in  human  life.  The  seventh  house  where  it  rises 
properly  denotes  the  most  intimate  of  all  those 
unions,  marriage.  From  that  union,  other  relation- 
ships result,  and  therefore  one  line  of  force  goes 
from  the  seventh  house  to  the  third  house,  occupied 
by  Gemini,  the  twins.  This  house  therefore  denotes 
brothers  and  sisters.  The  other  line  of  force  connects 
the  seventh  house  with  the  eleventh,  signifying  the 
unions  of  friendship. 

The  watery  triplicity  takes  its  rise  in  the  north- 
ern angle  occupied  by  the  cardinal  sign  Cancer, 
which  is  the  house  of  mystery,  denoting  the  latter 
part  of  life,  the  point  where  the  spirit  is  getting  ready 
to  withdraw  itself  from  material  existence  to  take  up 
the  activity  of  the  spiritual  worlds.  It  is  therefore 
connected  with  the  eighth  house,  the  house  of  death, 
which  is  occupied  by  the  sign  Scorpio.  It  is  signifi- 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     173 

cant  in  the  highest  degree  that  this  is  the  negative 
heuse  of  Mars,  and  that  it  rules  the  creative  organs. 
It  points  out  in  the  most  thorough  manner,  the  evan- 
escence of  all  that  is  created  in  the  physical  world. 
The  other  line  of  force  proceeding  from  the  fourth 
house  goes  to  the  sign  Pisces,  occupying  the  twelfth 
house.  Pisces,  which  is  composed  of  two  half -circles 
and  a  band,  shows  well  the  dual  nature  of  man  that 
has  run  its  course  in  the  physical  world,  but  has  an- 
other evolution  to  be  taken  up  in  unseen  realms.  This 
house,  therefore,  denotes  the  confinement  in  which 
the  spirit  realizes  that  it  is  at  the  end  of  life,  the 
sorrow  it  feels  and  the  self -undoing  'to  which  it  is 
sometimes  prompted. 

Tropic : 

'Tropikos'  is  a  Greek  word  which  has  a  meaning 
relative  to  turning,  and  the  tropics  of  Astronomy  are 
the  Iturning  points  of  the  Sun.  At  the  summer  sol- 
stice the  Sun  reaches  its  highest  degree  of  Northern 
Declination  in  the  sign  Cancer ;  this  then  is  its  tropic, 
for  from  that  point  it  begins  to  turn  downwards  to 
its  Western  node,  and  goes  into  Southern  Declin- 
ation. It  reaches  the  lowest  point  of  that  arc  in  De- 
cember at  the  winter  Solstice  in  the  sign  Capricorn. 
This  is  the  other  tropic,  for  there  again  rt  turns  and 
commences  its  next  ascent  towards  the  Northern 
heavens. 


174  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

Void  of  Course: 

When  the  planets  are  so  placed  that  the  Moon 
makes  no  aspect  before  leaving  the  sign  she  is  in  at 
birth,  she  is  said  to  be  'void  of  course.'  As  the  Moon 
is  the  planet  of  fecundation  which  nourishes  and 
nurses  the  latent  potentialities  into  actualities,  the 
above  is  an  unfortunate  condition,  for  with  it,  if  the 
Moon  is  in  the  beginning  of  a  sign  at  birth,  it  leaves 
the  life  vapid  and  void  of  incentive. 

Watery  Signs: 

Cancer,  Scorpio  and  Pisces  are  called  'watery' 
signs.  Water  is  the  Universal  Solvent,  and  the  Uni- 
versal Coagulant  in  the  alchemical  laboratory  of 
nature.  On  page  28  it  is  shown  how  the  Sun  of  Life, 
the  Ego,  passes  through  the  waters  of  parturition  in 
three  definite  stages  symbolized  by  the  watery  signs. 

When  the  Sun  is  at  the  highest  point  of  its  decli- 
nation in  the  psychic  watery  sign  Cancer,  designat- 
ed by  the  ancient  Egyptian  priests  the  sphere  of  the 
souls  awaiting  rebirth,  it  is  at  the  Throne  of  the 
Father,  the  Fountain  of  Life.  There  it  draws  from 
that  inexhaustible  well  a  new  supply  of  the  elixir 
vitae  for  the  coming  year,  and  forthwith  commences 
its  descent  to  bring  the  treasure  to  the  waiting  world. 

But  to  do  this  it  must  first  pass  through  the  fire 
of  its  own  sign  Leo,  and  blend  fire  and  water.  Upon 
the  successful  performance  of  this  alchemical  feat 
depends  all  manifested  life. 


A  PHILOSOPHIC  ENCYCLOPEDIA  OF  ASTROLOGY     175 

In  October  the  Sun  enters  the  second  of  the 
watery  signs,  Scorpio,  where  the  energetic  Lucifer 
Spirits  of  Mars  are  endeavoring  to  amalgamate  the 
two  antagonistic  elements,  but  not  with  complete  suc- 
cess, for  the  fire  of  passion  and  the  waters  of  emotion 
seethe,  boil  and  foam  in  war  and  strife.  Thus  the 
pure  essence  of  life  received  from  our  Father  in 
Heaven  becoms  tainted  with  passion  when  dragged 
through  the  pool  of  Scorpio,  and  to  offset  this  taint 
it  is  bathed  in  the  fire  of  aspiration  when  the  Sun 
reaches  the  fiery  sign  Sagittarius  at  Christmas. 

In  March  the  Sun's  passage  through  the  last  of 
the  watery  signs,  Pisces,  raises  the  sap  in  the  trees, 
swells  the  seeds  and  buds  by  the  expansive  ray  of  the 
benefic  Jupiter  till  they  are  ready  to  burst,  and  when 
the  Sun  of  Life  enters  in  exaltation  of  power  the 
fiery  sign  Aries,  it  utters  the  creative  fiat  and  all 
nature  bursts  forth  in  glorious  splendor.  The  Flame 
of  Divine  Life  germinated  and  gestated  In  the  watery 
womb  of  nature  is  then  manifest  in  the  world. 

Zenith : 

The  highest  point  in  the  heavens  above  the  birth- 
place, where  the  Sun  is  at  noon,  also  called  the  Mid- 
heaven.  This  is  the  same  for  all  latitudes  at  a  given 
sidereal  time.  Thus,  if  two  children  were  born  at  the 
same  sidereal  time,  one  in  Alaska,  the  other  in  Mexi- 
co, both  would  have  the  same  degree  of  the  Zodiac 

on  ihe  Midheaven,  but  their  Ascendants  and  other 
12 


176  SIMPLIFIED    SCIENTIFIC    ASTROLOGY 

cusps  would  be  materially  different,  causing  the 
planets  to  be  placed  in  different  houses,  and  making 
the  lives  dissimilar  in  every  other  respect.  See  'Mid- 
heaven'  and  'Houses.' 

Zodiac : 

A  narrow  belt  in  the  heavens  extending  about 
eight  degrees  on  either  side  of  the  ecliptic  or  Sun's 
path.  See  'Intellectual  Zodiac.' 


TABLES 


177 


Min. 


TABLE  OF  PROPORTIONAL  LOGARITHMS 
Hours  or  Degrees 


0          1          2345678 

0 

3.1584 

1.3802 

1.0792 

9031 

7781 

6812 

6021 

5351 

4771 

1 

3.1584 

.3730 

.0756 

07 

63 

6798 

09 

41 

62 

2  [2.8573 

.3660)'  ,0720  18983 

45 

84 

5997 

30 

53 

c 

.6812 

.3590 

.0685 

59 

28 

69 

85 

20 

44 

4 

.5563 

.3522 

.0649 

35 

10 

55 

73 

10 

35 

K 

2.4594 

1.3454 

1.0614 

8912 

7692 

6741 

5961 

5300 

4726 

6 

.3802)'  .3388|'  .0580(8888 

74 

26 

49 

5289 

17 

7 

.3133 

.3323 

.0546 

65 

57 

12 

37 

79 

08 

8 

.2553 

.3258 

.0511 

42 

39 

6698 

25 

69 

4699 

9 

.2041 

.3195f  .0478f    19  f    22  f    84 

13 

59 

90 

10 

2.1584 

1.3133 

1.0444 

8796 

7604 

6670 

5902 

5249 

4682 

11 

.1170 

.3071 

.0411 

73 

7587 

56 

5890 

39 

73 

12 

,0792 

.3010 

.0378 

51 

70 

42 

78 

29 

64 

13 

.0444 

.2950 

.0345 

28 

52 

28 

66 

19 

55 

14 

.0122 

.2891 

.0313 

06 

35 

14 

55 

09 

46 

15 

1.9823 

1.2833 

1.0280 

8683 

7518 

6600 

5843 

5199 

4638 

16 

.9542 

.2775 

.0248 

61 

01 

6587 

32 

89 

29 

17 

.9279 

.2719 

.0216 

39 

7484 

73 

20 

79 

20 

18 

.9031 

.2663 

.0185 

17 

67 

59 

09 

69 

11 

19 

.8796 

.2607 

.0153 

8595 

51 

46 

5797 

59 

03 

20 

1.8573 

1.2553 

1.0122 

8573 

7434 

6532 

5786 

5149 

4594 

21 

.8361 

.2499 

.0091 

52 

17 

19 

74 

39 

85 

22 

.8159 

.2445 

.0061 

30 

01 

05 

63 

29 

77 

23 

.7966 

.2393 

.0030 

09 

7384 

6492 

52 

20 

68 

24 

.7781 

.2341 

1.0000 

8487 

68 

78 

40 

10 

59 

25 

1.7604 

1.2289 

0.9970 

8466 

7351 

6465 

5729 

5100 

4551 

26 

.7434)  .2239 

.9940]     45 

35 

51 

18 

5090 

42 

27 

.7270 

.2188 

.9910 

24 

18 

38 

06 

81 

34 

28 

.7112 

.2139 

.9881 

03 

02 

25 

5692 

71 

25 

29 

.6960 

.2090 

.9852 

8382 

7286 

12 

84 

61 

16 

178 


SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 


Min. 


TABLE  OF  PROPORTIONAL  LOGARITHMS 
Hours  or  Degrees 


0          1          2345678 

30 

1.6812 

1.2041 

0.9823 

8361 

7270 

6398 

5673 

5051 

4508 

31 

.6670 

.1993 

.9794 

41 

54 

85 

62 

42 

4499 

32 

.6532 

.1946 

.9765 

21 

38 

72 

51 

32 

91 

33 

.6398 

.1899 

.9737 

00 

22 

59 

40 

23 

82 

34 

.6269 

.1852 

.9708 

8279 

06 

46 

29 

13 

74 

35 

1.6143 

1.1806 

0.9680 

8259 

7190 

6333 

5618 

5003 

4466 

36|  .6021)  .176lf  .9652 

39 

74 

20 

07 

4994 

57 

37 

.5902 

.1716    ,9625 

19 

59 

07 

5596 

84 

49 

38 

.5786 

.1671 

.9597 

8199 

43 

6294 

85 

75 

40 

39 

.5673 

,1627 

.9570 

79 

28 

82 

74 

65 

32 

40 

1.5563 

1.1584 

0.9542 

8159 

7112 

6269 

5563 

4956 

4424 

41  f.  5456 

.1540 

.9515 

40 

7097 

56f     52 

47 

15 

42 

.5351 

.1498 

.9488 

20 

81 

43 

41 

37 

07 

43 

.5249 

.1455 

.9462 

01 

66 

31 

°1 

28 

4399 

44 

.5149 

.1413 

.9435 

8081 

50 

18 

20 

18 

90 

45 

1.5051 

1.1372 

0.9409 

8062 

7035 

6205 

5509 

4909 

4382 

46 

.4956 

.1331 

.9383 

43 

20 

6193 

5498 

00 

74 

47 

.4863 

.1290 

.9356 

23 

05 

80 

88 

4890 

65 

48 

.4771 

.1249 

.9330 

04 

6990 

68 

77 

81 

57 

49 

.4682 

.1209 

.9305 

7985 

75 

55 

66 

72 

49 

50 

1.4594 

1.1170 

0.9279 

7966 

6960 

6143 

5456 

4863 

4341 

51 

.4508 

.1130 

.9254 

47 

45 

31 

45 

53 

33 

52 

.4424 

.1091 

.9228 

29 

30 

18 

35 

44 

24 

53 

.4341 

.1053 

.9203 

10 

15 

06 

24 

35 

16 

54 

.4260 

,1015 

.9178 

7891 

00 

6094 

14 

26 

08 

55 

1.4180 

1.0977 

0.9153 

7873 

6885 

6081 

5403 

4817 

4300 

56 

.4102 

.0939 

.9128 

54 

71 

69 

5393 

08 

4292 

57 

.4025 

.0902 

.9104 

36 

56 

57 

82 

4799 

84 

58 

.3949 

.0865 

.9079 

18 

41 

45 

72 

89 

76 

59 

.3875 

.0828 

.9055 

00 

27 

33 

61 

80 

68 

TABLES 


179 


Min. 


Hours  or  Degrees 


9    10    11   12   13   14   15   16   17 

0 

4260 

3802 

3388 

3010 

2663 

2341 

2041 

1761 

1498 

1 

52 

3795 

82 

04 

57 

36 

36 

56 

93 

2 

44 

88 

75 

2998 

52 

30 

32 

52 

89 

c 

•  i. 

36 

80 

68 

92 

46 

25 

27 

47 

85 

4 

28 

73 

62 

86 

41 

20 

22 

43 

81 

K 

4220 

3766 

3355 

2980 

2635 

2315 

2017 

1738 

1476 

6 

12 

59 

49 

74 

29 

10 

12 

34 

72 

7 

04 

52 

42 

68 

24 

05 

08 

29 

68 

8 

4196 

45 

36 

62 

18 

00 

03 

25 

64 

9 

88 

38 

29 

56 

13 

2295 

1998 

20 

60 

10 

4180 

3730 

3323 

2950 

2607 

89 

1993 

1716 

1455 

11 

72 

23 

16 

45 

02 

84 

89 

11 

51 

12 

64 

16 

10 

38 

2596 

79 

84 

07 

47 

13 

56 

09  03 

33 

91 

74 

79 

02 

43 

14 

49 

02  3297 

27 

85 

69 

74 

1698 

38 

15 

4141 

3695 

3291 

2921 

2580 

2264 

1969 

1694 

1434 

16 

33 

88 

84 

15 

75 

59 

65 

89 

30 

17 

25 

81 

78 

09 

69 

54 

60 

85 

26 

18 

17 

74 

71 

03 

64 

49 

55 

80 

22 

19 

09 

67 

65 

2897 

58 

44 

50 

76 

17 

20 

4102 

3660 

3258 

2891 

2553 

2239 

1946 

1671 

1413 

21 

4094 

53 

52 

85 

47 

34 

41 

67 

09 

22 

86 

46 

46 

80 

42 

29 

36 

63 

05 

23 

79 

39 

39 

74 

36 

23  1'  32 

58 

01 

24 

71 

32 

33 

68 

31 

18!  27 

54 

1397 

25 

4063 

3625 

3227 

2862 

2526 

2213 

1922 

1649 

1393 

26 

55 

18 

20 

56 

20 

08 

17 

45 

88 

27 

48 

11 

14 

50 

15 

03 

13 

40 

84 

28 

40 

04 

08 

45 

09 

2198 

08 

36 

80 

29 

32 

3597 

01 

39 

04 

93 

03 

32 

76 

180 


SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 


TABLE  OF  PROPORTIONAL  LOGARITHMS 
Hours  or  Degrees 


9    10    11   12   13   14   15   16   n 

30  |  4025 

3590 

3195 

2833 

2499 

2188 

1899 

1627 

13 

31|   17 

83 

89 

27 

93 

83 

94 

23 

32  1   10 

77 

83 

21 

88 

78 

90 

19 

33  1   02 

70 

76 

16 

83 

73 

85 

14 

34 

3995 

63 

70 

10 

77 

68 

80 

10 

35 

3987 

3556 

3164 

2804 

2472 

2164 

1875 

1605 

13 

36  f  79 

49 

57 

2798 

67 

59 

71 

01 

37  1  72 

42 

51 

93 

61 

54 

66 

1597 

38|   64 

35 

45 

87 

56 

49 

62 

92 

39 

57 

29 

39 

81 

51 

44 

57 

88 

40 

3949 

3522 

3133 

2775 

2445 

2139 

1852 

1584 

13 

41 

42 

15 

26 

70 

40 

34 

48 

79 

42 

34 

08 

20 

64 

35 

29 

43 

75 

43 

27 

01 

14 

58 

30 

24 

38 

71 

44 

19 

3495 

08 

53 

24 

19 

34 

66 

45 

3912 

3488 

3102 

2747 

2419 

2114 

1829 

1562 

13 

46 

05 

81 

3096 

41 

14 

09 

25 

58 

47 

3897 

75  1'   89 

36 

09 

04 

20 

53 

48 

90 

68 

83 

30 

03 

2099 

16 

49 

12 

49 

82 

61 

77 

24 

2398 

2095 

11 

45 

50 

3875 

3455 

3071 

2719 

2393 

2090 

1806 

1540 

12 

51 

68 

48 

65 

13 

88 

85 

021   36 

52 

60 

41 

59 

07 

82 

80!  1797 

32 

53 

53 

35 

53 

02 

77 

75 

93 

28 

54 

46 

28 

47 

2696 

72 

70 

88 

23 

55 

3838 

3421 

3041 

2691 

2367 

2065 

1784 

1519 

12 

56 

31 

15 

35 

85 

62 

61 

79 

15 

57 

24 

08 

28 

79 

56 

56 

74 

10 

58 

17 

01 

22 

74 

51 

51 

70 

06 

59 

09 

3395 

16 

68 

46 

46 

65 

02 

TABLES 


181 


SAMPLE  PAGE 
SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  TABLES  OF  HOUSES 


Latitude  41°  N. 


Latitude  42°  N. 


Sider'l||10|ll|12 

Time||n|S|<a 

Asc. 

TIB 

2|  3||10|11|12|    Asc. 

2|  3 
T^l— 

H  M  S 
3  51  15 

o 

0 

0 

5 

o 

7 

o            / 

4      37 

o 
28 

0 

27 

o 

0 

o 

5 

°l 
7 

o           / 

4      51 

o 

28 

o 

27 

55  26 

1 

6 

8 

5      26 

29 

28 

1 

6 

8 

5      40 

29 

28 

59  36 

2 

7 

9 

6      15 

^± 

29 

2 

7 

9 

6      29 

=2= 

29 

4    3  48 
8    0 

3 

4 

8 
9 

10 
11 

7        4 
7      54 

1 
2 

1 

3 

4 

Q 

9 

10 
11 

7      18 

8        7 

1 

2 

HI 

0 

12  13 

5 

9 

11 

8      44 

3 

2 

5 

10 

12 

8      56 

3 

1 

4  16  26 

6 

10 

12 

9      33 

4 

3 

6 

11 

13 

9      45 

4 

2 

20  40 

7 

11 

13 

10      23 

5 

4 

7 

12 

14 

10      35 

5 

3 

24  55 

8 

12 

14 

11      13 

6 

5 

8 

13 

15 

11      24 

6 

4 

4  29  10 

9 

13 

15 

12        4 

7 

6 

9 

14 

16 

12      14 

7 

5 

33  26 

10 

14 

16 

12      54 

7 

7 

10 

14 

16 

13        4 

7 

6 

37  42 

11 

15 

17 

13      44f  8f  8ffll|i5|i7|i3      54 

8 

7 

4  41  59 

12 

16 

18 

14      35 

9 

9 

12 

16 

18 

14      44 

9 

8 

46  16 

13 

17 

19 

15      26 

10 

10 

13 

17 

19 

15      34 

10 

9 

50  34 

14 

18 

20 

16      17 

11 

11 

14 

18 

20 

16      25 

11 

10 

4  54  52 

15 

19 

20 

17        7 

12 

12 

15 

19 

20 

17      15 

12 

11 

59  10 

16 

20 

21 

17      58 

13 

13 

16 

20 

21 

18        5 

13 

12 

5    3  29 

17 

21 

22 

18      50 

14 

14 

17 

21 

22 

18      56 

14 

13 

5    7  49 
12    9 
16  29 

18 
19 
20 

22 

23 
24 

23119      41|15|15|18|22 
24120       32J16J16|19|23 

25|21      23[17|16|120|24 

23|19      47 
24J20      38 

25{21      28 

15 
16 
17 

14 
15 
16 

182 


SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 


SAMPLE  PAGE 
SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  TABLES  OF  HOUSES 


Latitude  41°  N. 


Latitude  42°  N. 


Sider'l||10|ll|12 
Time||TrEH=a= 

|    Asc. 
ni     1 

213 
t\V3\ 

|10|11 

Ti%\^ 

|12 

; 

Asc. 

2, 

2 

/ 

3 

V3 

H  M  S 
10    8  23 
12  12 
16    0 

o 

0 
1 
2 

o  | 

2 
3 

4 

o 

28 
29 
HI 

o             / 

18      44 
19       20 
20      13 

o 

19 
20 
21 

o 

24 
25 
26| 

o 

o 
1 

12 

O     |O 

2|28 
|  3|29 

4|TTl 

o            / 

18      17 
19        1 
19      46 

o 

18 
19 
20 

0 

23 
24 
25 

10  19  48 

3 

5 

0 

20   58 

22 

27 

3 

5 

0 

20   30 

21 

26 

23  35 

4 

6 

1 

21   42 

23 

28 

4 

6 

1 

21   14 

22 

27 

27  22 

5 

7 

2 

22   27 

23 

28 

5 

7 

2 

21   58 

22 

28 

10  31  8 

6 

8 

3 

23   7 

24 

29 

6 

8 

3 

22   42 

23 

29 

34  54 

7 

9 

4 

23   55 

25 

f*» 

7 

9 

4 

23   26 

24 

f*+t 

*/vV 

38  40 

8 

10 

5 

24   40 

26 

~1 

8 

10 

5 

24   10 

25 

1 

10  42  25 

9 

11 

6 

25   24 

27 

2 

9 

11 

6 

24   53 

26 

2 

46  9 

10 

11 

6 

26    8 

27 

3 

10 

11 

6 

25   38 

26 

3 

49  53 

11 

12 

7 

26   52 

28 

4 

11 

12|  7 

26   21 

27 

4 

10  53  37 

12 

13 

8 

27   36 

29 

5 

12 

13 

8 

27   5 

28 

5 

57  20 

13 

14 

9 

28   20 

V3 

6 

13 

14 

9 

27   49 

29 

6 

11  1  3 

14 

15 

10 

29   5 

0 

7 

14 

15110 

28   32 

V3 

7 

11  4  46 

15 

16 

10 

29   49 

1 

8 

15 

16 

10 

29   16 

1 

8 

8  28 

16 

17 

11 

0/33 

2 

9 

16 

17 

11 

0/0 

2 

9 

12  10 

17 

18 

12 

1   17 

3 

10 

17 

18 

12 

0   43 

3 

10 

11  15  22 

18 

19 

13 

2   1 

4 

11 

18 

19 

12 

1   27 

4 

11 

19  34 

19 

20 

14 

2   45 

5 

12 

19 

20 

13 

2   11 

5 

12 

23  15 

20 

20 

14 

3   29 

6 

13 

20 

20 

13 

2   55 

5 

13 

TABLES 


183 


SAMPLE  PAGE 
SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  TABLES  OF  HOUSES 


Latitude  41°  N. 


Latitude  42°  N. 


"  Sider'l||10 
Time  I)  / 

11|12|     Ase.    |  2 
/  \V3\        £?       X 

3 
8 

10 
t 

11 
t 

12 

Itf 

Asc. 

/*w 

MW 

2 

X 

3 

8 

H  M  S| 
15  51  15 
55  25 
59  36 

o 

0 
1 
2 

1° 
21 

22 
23 

1° 
12 
13 
14 

o           / 

8      57 
10      20 
11      45 

1° 
27 
29 
T 

1° 
4 

5 
6 

\  ° 
0 
1 
2 

o 

21 

22 
23 

° 
12 

13 
14 

0                ,| 

8        8 
9      32 
10      58 

°l 
27 
29 
T 

o 

4 
5 
6 

16  3  48 

3 

24 

15 

13   12 

1 

7 

3 

24 

15 

12   25 

1 

7 

7  0 

4 

25 

17 

14   40 

3 

9 

4 

25 

16 

13   54 

3 

8 

12  13 

5 

26 

18 

16   9 

4 

10 

5 

26 

17 

15   24 

4 

10 

16  16  26 

6 

27 

19 

17   40 

5 

11 

6 

27 

18 

16   56 

5 

12 

20  40 

7 

28 

20 

19   12 

6 

13 

7 

28 

19 

18   28 

6 

13 

24  55 

8 

29 

21 

20   46 

8 

14 

8 

29 

20 

20   3 

8 

14 

16  29  10 

9 

V3 

22 

22   21 

10 

15 

9 

V3 

22 

21   39 

10 

15 

33  26 

10 

1 

23 

23   57 

12 

16 

10 

1 

23 

23   17 

12 

16 

37  42 

11 

2 

24 

25   35 

13 

17 

11 

2 

24 

24   56 

13 

17 

16  41  59 

12 

3 

25 

27   14 

15 

18 

12 

3 

25 

26   36 

14 

18 

46  16 

13 

4 

26 

28   54 

17 

20 

13 

4 

26 

28   18 

16 

19 

50  34 

14 

5 

27 

0  *36 

19 

21 

14 

5 

27 

0X1 

18 

20 

16  54  52 

15 

6 

29 

2   19 

20 

22 

15 

6 

28 

1   46 

20 

22 

59  10 

16 

7 

>w 

WMV 

4   4 

21 

23 

16 

7 

yvw 
/**v 

3   32 

21 

23 

17  3  29 

17 

8 

1 

5   50 

23 

24 

17 

8 

1 

5   20 

23 

25 

17  7  49 

18 

9 

2 

7   36 

25 

25 

18 

9 

2 

7   8 

25 

26 

12  9 

19 

10 

4 

9   24 

26 

26 

19 

10 

3 

8   58 

27 

27 

16  29 

20 

11 

5 

11   13(27 

27 

20 

11 

5 

10   49 

28 

28 

184  SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  ASTROLOGY 

SAMPLE  PAGE 
SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC  TABLES  OF  HOUSES 


Latitude  41°  N. 


Latitude  42°  N. 


Sider'l||10|ll 

Time||^|T 

|12|   Asc. 

•»|     n 

2 

Z 

81 
Sl\ 

10|11|12 

XT|S 

Asc. 

n 

2 

HE 

3 

SI 

H  M  S| 
22    8  23 
12  12 
16    0 

°l 
0 
1 
2 

°l 
3 
4 
5 

°l 

14 
15 
16 

0                  / 

24      37 
25      31 
26      25 

o 

15 
16 
17 

o 

5 
6 

7 

o 

0 
1 

2 

o 

3 

4 
5 

o 

15 
16 
17 

0                   / 

25      24 
26      19 
27      12 

1° 
15 
16 
17 

\  ° 
6 
7 
8 

22  19  48 

3 

6 

17 

27   19 

18 

8 

3 

6 

18 

28   6 

18 

9 

23  35 

4 

8 

19 

28   12 

19 

9 

4 

8 

19 

28   59 

19 

10 

27  22 

5 

9 

20|29   5 

19 

10 

5 

9 

21 

29   51 

19 

10 

22  31  8 

6 

10 

21 

29   57 

20 

11 

6 

10 

22 

0  ^43  20 

11 

34  54 

7 

11 

22 

0  S48 

21 

12 

7 

11 

23 

1   34 

21 

12 

38  40 

8 

12 

23 

1   40 

22 

13 

8 

12 

24 

2   25 

22 

13 

22  42  25 

9 

13 

24 

2   30 

23 

14 

9 

13 

25 

3   15 

23 

14 

46  9 

10 

14 

26 

3   21 

23 

14 

10 

14 

26 

4   5 

23 

14 

49  53 

11 

15 

27 

4   10 

24 

15 

11 

15 

27 

4   55 

24 

15 

22  53  37 

12 

16 

28 

5   0 

25 

16 

12 

16 

28 

5   44 

25 

16 

57  20 

13 

17 

29 

5   49 

26 

17 

13 

17 

29 

6   33 

26 

17 

23  1  3 

14 

18 

29 

6   38 

27 

18 

14 

18 

n 

7   22 

27 

18 

23  4  46|115|20|n|  7   27 

27 

18| 

15 

20 

i 

8   10 

27 

19 

8  28||16|21|  1|  8   16 

28 

19| 

16 

21 

2 

8   58 

28 

20 

12  10||17|23|  2|  9   3 

28(20| 

17 

22 

3 

9   46 

29 

21 

23  15  52 

18 

24 

3 

9   51 

29 

21 

18 

23 

4 

10   33 

a 

22 

19  34 

19 

25 

4 

10   38 

29 

22 

19 

25 

5 

11   20 

0 

23 

23  15 

20 

26 

6 

11   26 

a 

23 

20 

26 

6 

12   7 

i 

23 

SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC 
EPHEMERIS  OF  THE  PLANETS'  PLACES 

Calculated  for  Mean  Noon  at  Greenwich 

August,  1909 

New  Moon  August  15th  in  SI  21°  59' 
Longitude  of  the  Planets 


D 

O 

9 

$ 

D 

i? 

n 

$ 

V 

V 

ft 

0  cfl' 

°T1K' 

°si' 

O  /^v  / 

MM 

O  op/ 

0  TO' 

O  op/ 

°V3' 

o  a~t 

°  n' 

1 

8  33 

3  56 

5  12 

3   22 

23  13 

14  58 

3  40 

18R18 

17  ~40 

13  50 

2 

9  31 

5   9 

7  17 

17  55 

13 

15  10 

57 

15 

42 

47 

3 

10  28 

6  21 

9  22 

2  K39 

14 

21 

4  12 

13 

44 

44 

4 

11  25 

7  34 

11  27 

17  28 

14 

33 

27 

11 

46 

41 

5 

12  23 

8  47 

13  30 

2  T14 

14 

45 

41 

9 

48 

38 

6 

13  20 

10  0 

15  33 

16  48 

Bl4 

56 

55 

7 

50 

34 

7 

14  18 

11  13 

17  35 

188 

23  14 

16  815   8 

18  5 

17  52 

13  31 

8 

15  15 

12  26 

19  35 

15  11 

13 

20 

20 

3 

54 

28 

9 

16  13 

13  38 

21  34 

28  55 

13 

32 

31 

11   56 

25 

10 

17  10 

14  51 

23  32 

12n22 

13 

44   42 

17  59 

58 

22 

11 

18  8 

16  4 

25  28 

25  35 

12 

56 

52 

57 

18  0 

19 

12 

19  6 

17  17 

27  23 

8  S33 

11 

17  8 

6   1 

55 

2 

15 

13 

20  3 

18  29 

29  16|21  20 

10 

20 

9 

53 

4 

12 

14 

21  1 

19  42 

llQfl 

3  £156 

23  10 

17  33|6  17 

17  51 

18  6 

13  9 

15 

21  59 

20  55 

2  59 

16  21 

9 

45 

24 

49 

8 

6 

16 

22  56 

22  7 

4  48 

28  38|    7 

57 

30 

47 

10 

3 

17 

23  54 

23  20 

6  35 

lun$45 

6 

18  10 

35 

45 

12 

0 

18 

24  52 

24  33 

8  22 

22  45 

5 

22 

39 

44 

14 

12  56 

19 

25  50 

25  45 

10  6 

4  =^=39 

4 

34 

42 

42 

16 

53 

20 

26  47 

26  58 

11  50 

16  29 

2 

47 

45 

40 

18 

50 

21 

27  45 

28  10 

13  32 

28  19 

23  0 

18  59 

6  47 

17  39 

18  19 

12  47 

22 

28  43 

29  23 

15  12 

10TTU2 

22  59 

19  12 

48 

37 

21 

44 

23 

29  41 

0=^35 

16  51 

22  14 

57 

24 

48 

35 

23 

41 

24 

01^39 

1  47 

18  29 

4/29 

55 

37 

E47 

34 

25 

37 

25 

1  37 

3   0 

20  6 

17   2 

53 

49 

45 

32 

26 

34 

26 

2  35 

4  12 

21  41 

29  59 

51 

20  2 

43 

31 

28 

31 

27 

3  32 

5  25 

23  15 

13V323 

49 

15 

40 

29 

30 

28 

28 

4  30 

6  37 

24  47 

27  17 

22  47 

20  27 

6  36 

17  28 

18  32 

12  25 

29 

5  28 

7  49 

26  18 

11-^38 

44 

40 

31 

27 

33 

22 

30 

6  26 

9   1 

27  48 

26  25 

42 

53 

25 

25 

35 

18 

31 

7  24 

10  13 

29  17 

11X28 

22  39 

21  6 

6  19 

17  24 

18  36 

12  15 

SIMPLIFIED  SCIENTIFIC 

EPHBMERIS  OF  THE  PLANETS'  PLACES 
Calculated  for  Mean  Noon  at  Greenwich 

August,  1909 

Full  Moon  August  1st  in  £?  8°  33' 
Full  Moon  August  31st  in  X  7°  24' 
Declination  of  the  Planets 


D 

ST 

O 

2 

« 

D 

i? 

2| 

$ 

9 

tp 

N 

N 

N 

S 

N 

N 

S 

S 

N 

1 

8  37 

18  8 

11  28 

20  29 

23  6 

6  38 

6  56 

2  59 

22  40 

21  36 

2 

41 

17  53 

11  0 

20   2 

19  46 

38 

51 

54 

40 

36 

3 

45 

17  37 

10  32 

19  32 

15  10 

38 

47 

50 

41 

35 

4 

49 

17  22 

10  4 

19   1 

9  38 

38 

42 

46 

41 

35 

5 

53 

17  6 

9  36 

18  27 

3  34 

38 

38 

42 

41 

36 

6 

57 

16  49 

9   7 

17  52 

2  N37 

38 

33 

39 

41 

35 

7 

9   1 

16  33 

8  38 

17  16 

8  34 

6  37 

6  28 

2  36 

22  42121  34 

8 

5 

16  16 

8   9 

16  38 

13  59 

37 

23 

33 

42 

34 

9 

9 

15  59 

7  40 

15  59 

18  34 

36 

19 

30 

43 

34 

10 

13 

15  42 

7  11 

15  19 

22  &   36 

14 

27 

43 

34 

11 

17 

15  24 

6  41 

14  38 

24  20 

35 

9 

25 

48 

33 

12 

21 

15  6 

6  11 

13  56 

25  13 

35 

4 

23 

43 

38 

13 

25 

14  48 

5  41 

13  13 

24  45 

34 

0 

22 

44 

33 

14 

9  29 

14  30 

5  11 

12  30 

23  0 

6  34 

5  55 

2  20 

22  44 

21  38 

15 

33 

14  11 

4  41 

11  47 

20  11 

33 

50 

19 

44 

32 

16 

36 

13  52 

4  10 

11   3 

16  30 

33 

45 

18 

44 

32 

17 

40 

13  34 

3  40 

10  18 

12  10 

32 

40 

18 

44 

31 

18 

44 

13  14 

3   9 

9   34 

7  26 

31 

36 

17 

44 

31 

19 

48 

12  55 

2  38 

8   49 

2  27 

30 

31 

17 

45 

31 

20 

52 

12  35 

2   8 

8    4 

2  s35 

30 

26 

17 

45 

31 

21 

9  56 

12  15 

1  37 

7   20 

7  33 

6  29 

5  21 

2  18 

22  45 

21  30 

22 

10  0 

11  55 

1   6 

6   35 

12  16 

28 

16 

18 

45 

30 

23 

4 

11  35 

0  35 

5   50 

16  35 

27 

11 

19 

46 

30 

24 

8 

11  15 

0   4 

5    5 

20  18 

26 

6 

21 

46 

30 

25 

12 

10  54 

0  s27 

4   21 

23  9 

25 

1 

22 

46 

30 

26 

16 

10  34 

0  58 

3   36 

24  55 

24 

4  56 

24 

46 

30 

27 

20 

10  13 

1  29 

2   52 

25  18 

23 

51 

26 

47 

29 

28 

10  24 

9  52 

2   0 

2    9 

24  9 

6  22 

4  46 

2  28 

22  47 

21  29 

29 

28 

9  30 

2  31 

1   25 

21  25 

21 

41 

30 

47 

29 

30 

32 

9   9 

8   2 

0   42 

17  14 

20 

36 

33 

47 

29 

31 

10  36 

8  47 

8  33 

0  8  1 

11  53 

6  19 

4  31 

2  35 

22  47 

21  28 

187 


TABLE    OF  PLANETARY  HOURS 
/or 

DECEMBER  AND  JANUARY  IN  NORTH  LATITUDE 
JUNE  AND  JULY  IN  SOUTH  LATITUDE 

HOUR    RULERS  AND    DAYS 

S       M       T       W       T        F        3 

25°35° 

35°45° 

45°55° 

Sunrise 

A.M. 

A.M. 

A.M. 

0      J>      d1      9      V      9      »? 

6.56 

7.25 

6.5 

9      i?      0      ]>      <J      9      U 

7.46 

6.10 

8.45 

9      V      9      •?      6      J)      d1 

6.36 

6.56 

9.24 

J     d1      9     V      9      »?     0 

9.29 

9.42 

10.3 

»?     0      »     cf      9     V      9 

10.19 

10.26 

10.42 

V      9      •?      0      J»     cf      9 

11.10 

11.14 

11.21 

Noon 

P.M. 

P.  M. 

P.M. 

cT      9      #      9      »?      0      ) 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

0      D     d*      9      ¥      9      »? 

0.50 

0.46 

0.39 

9      *?      0      D     d1      9      V 

1.41 

1.32 

1.18 

9      V      9      »?      0      D      d1 

2.31 

2.16 

1.57 

D     d1     9     V      9      •?      0 

3.22 

3.4 

2.36 

»?      0      J)     cf      <?     ¥      9 

4.12 

3.50 

3.15 

Sunset 

P.  M. 

P.  M. 

P.  M. 

U      9      •?      0      D      d1      <? 

5.2 

4.35 

3.55 

Cf      <?      V      9      •?      0      J 

6.12 

5.50 

5.15 

0      J      d1      9      V      9      •? 

7.22 

7.4 

6.36 

9      •?      0      D      cf      <?      V 

6.31 

6.18 

7.57 

9      U      9      •?      O      D      cf 

9.41 

9.32 

9.16 

&      cf      <?      V      9      •?      0 

10.50 

10.46 

10.39 

Midni5ht 

A  M 

A  M 

A.M. 

»?      0      J>      c^      <?      ^      9 

o.o 

0.0 

0.0 

V      9      ^      0      D      cf      9 

1.10 

1.14 

1.21 

d1      <?      V      9      >?      o      D 

2  19 

2.28 

2.42 

0      I     cT      9     ^      9      »? 

3.29 

3.42 

4.3 

9      •?      0  '     J     rf      9      V 

4.36 

4.56 

5.24 

9      V      9     J?      0      D     d 

5.46 

5.10 

6.45 

188 


TABLE   OF  PLANETARY  HOURS 
/or 
NOVEMBER  AND  FEBRUARY  IN  NORTH  LATITUDE 
MAY  ANO  AUGUST  IN  SOUTH  LATITUDE 

HQUR    RULERS   AND   DAYS 

S       M       t       W       T  .IF        S 

25°35° 

35°45° 

45°55° 

Sunrise 

A.M. 

A.M. 

A.M. 

O      D     cf     V      V      9     -1? 

6.38 

6.56 

7.20 

9      *?      O      D     cf     9     .V 

7.31 

7.46 

8.7 

9      .V      <9      *?     O      J>      cf 

8.25 

8.37 

6.54 

D     d      9      V      9      *?      O 

9.19 

9.28 

9.40 

i?      O      D     cf      9     *      9 

10.12 

10.18 

10.27 

2/      9      •?      0      >     cf      9 
Noon 

11.7 

P.M. 

11.9 

P.M. 

11.13 

P.  M 

cf      9      #      9      »?      O      D 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

0      D     cf      9     V      9      •? 

0.54 

0.51 

0.47 

9      •?     O      &     cf      9     V 

1.48 

1.42 

1.34 

,9      V1     9      *?      O     >     cf 

2.42 

2.32 

2.20 

D     cf     9    'V      9      *?     O 

3.35 

3.23 

3.6 

•?     0      D     cf      ?     V      9 
Sunset 

4.29 

P.M. 

4.14 

P  M. 

3.53 

P.  M 

I/      9      *?      0      J>      cf      9 

5.22 

5.4 

4.40 

Cf      9      V      9      »?      0      » 

6.29 

6.14 

5.53 

O      D      d1      9      V      9      *? 

7.35 

7.23 

7.6 

9      V      O      J      cf      9      V 

8.42 

8.32 

8.20 

<?      V      9      »?      O      D      cf 

9.48 

9.42 

9.34 

J      cf      <?      ¥      9      »?      0 
Midni$bt 

10.54 

A.M. 

10.51 

A-M. 

10.47 

A.M. 

^      O      >     d1      $      %      ^ 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

V      9      ^      O      1>      cf      9 

1.6 

1.9 

1.13 

d1      0      V      9      »?      0      D 

2.  It 

£.15 

2.27 

0     >     cf     <?     V-     9      •? 

3.19 

3.28 

3.40 

^     V      O      D     cf      9     "V 

4.25 

4.37 

4.54 

9      ¥     9      V     O      D     cf 

5.31 

5.46 

6.7 

189 


TABLE    CF  PLANETARY   HOURS 
for 
OCTOBER  AND  MARCH  INNORTH  LATITUDE 
APRIL  AND  SEPTEMBER  IN  SOUTH  LATITUDE 

HOUR    RULERS  AND   DAYS 

S        M        T       W       T        F        S 

25°  35° 

35°45° 

450550 

Sunrise 

A.M. 

A.M. 

A.M. 

0      D      d      9      H      9      *? 

6.19 

6.27 

6.39 

9      *?      G      D      d*      9      U 

7.15 

7  22 

7.32 

9      H      9      »?      0      D      cf 

8.12 

8.18 

8.26 

D     cf      9      V      9      »?      0 

9.9 

9.13 

9.19 

>?      0      D     c?      9      2/      9 

10.6 

10.9 

10.13 

V      9      •?      O      D      cf      5 

11.3 

11.4 

II.  6 

Noon 

P.M. 

P.M. 

P.M. 

cf      9      V      9      »?      O      D 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

G      J      d1      9      V      9      *? 

0.57 

0.56 

0.54 

9      *?      0      D      d1      9      U 

1.54 

1.51 

1.47 

$     n      9      *?      O      ))     d* 

2.51 

2.47 

2.41 

1)     c/      9      V      9      •?      O 

3.48 

3.42 

3.34 

»?      0      D     cf      9     V      9 

4.45 

4.38 

4.28 

Sunset 

P.M. 

P.M. 

P.M. 

2/      9      •?      O       D      cf      0 

5.41 

5.33 

5.21 

d1    ^     ^     9     •?    o     ^ 

6.45 

6.38 

6.28 

0     ">     d1      9      2/      9      »7 

7.48 

7.42 

7.34 

9      *?      O      )      d1      9      V 

8.51 

8.47 

8.41 

9     V      9      »?      0      J     d1 

9.54 

9.51 

9.47 

>      tf      9.     V      9      »?      C 

10.57 

10.56 

JO.  54 

rlidn  1  5"* 

A.M. 

ArNL 

AJ*t 

»?      0      >     d1     <?     U      9 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

^      9      »?      0      >      cf      <? 

173 

1.4 

1.6 

d"     <?     V      9      •?     0      > 

2'.  6 

2.9 

2.13 

0      >     cf      9     V      Q      »? 

3.9 

3.13 

3.19 

9      •?      O      »     cf      9     V 

4.12 

4.18 

4.26 

9    n    9  j?    o    D   cf 

5.15 

5.22 

5.32 

190 


TABLE    CF  PLANETARY   HOURS 
/or 

APRIL  AND  SEPTEMBER  m  NORTH  LATITUDE 
OCTOBER  AND  MARCH  IN  SOUTH  LATITUDE 

HOUR    RULERS  AND   DAYS 

3  .  _.  M       T       V       T       F        S 

25°35° 

35°45° 

45°55° 

Sunrise 

A.M. 

A.M. 

A.M. 

0      >      cf      9      H      9      *) 

5.41 

5.33 

5.21 

9     *?     o      1>     cf     9     */ 

6.45 

6.36 

6.28 

9      V      9      •?      O      1>     cf 

7.48 

7.42 

7.34 

D     cf      9     V      9      »?     0 

6.51 

6.47 

6.41 

»?     o      3)     cf     9     n     9 

9.54 

9.51 

9.47 

H     9      •?     0     .)     cf      9 

10,57 

10.56 

10.54 

Noon 

P.M. 

P.M. 

P.M. 

Cf      9      U      9      »?      O      1> 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

O      >      cf      9      ¥      9      •? 

1.3 

1.4 

1.6 

9      »?      0      >     cf      £      V 

2.6 

2.9 

2.13 

0     V      9      •?      0      »     cf 

3.9 

3.13 

3.19 

>     cf     9     V      9      *?     0 

4.12 

4.16 

4.26 

h     O      >     cf      9     V     9 

5.15 

5.22 

5.32 

Sunset 

P.M. 

P.M. 

P.M. 

#     9      •?,     0      >     cf      0 

6.19 

6.27 

6.39 

<f     9      *      9      »?     O      D 

7.15 

7.22 

7.32 

0     >     cf     9     V      9     »? 

6.12 

6.16 

6.26 

$     '•?     0      )     cf     9     V 

9.9 

9.13 

9.19 

9     H     9     V     0     >     cf; 

10.6 

10.9 

10.13 

'|     '<f-     9      V      9      ^      O 

11.3 

11.4 

11.6 

Wfdi>i5nt 

A.M. 

A.M. 

A.M 

*?,     0     I     cf     <?     #      V 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

V«     9      ^     O     D     cf     9 

0.57 

0.56 

0.54 

cf     0      V      9      *?     O      D 

L54 

1.51 

1.47 

O     I     cf      9     2/      9      *? 

2.51 

2.47 

2.41 

0     V     O     D     cf      ^     ¥ 

3.46 

3.42 

3.34 

^L    ¥     9     »?     O     D     cf 

4.45 

4.36 

4.28 

191 


TABLE   OF  PLANETARY  HOURS 
for 

HAYAND  AUGUST  IN  NORTH  LATITUDE 
NOVEMBER  AND  FEBRUARY  IN:SOUTH  LATITUDE 

HOUR    RULERS   AND    DAY3 

S        M        T       W       T        F        S 

25°35C> 

35°45° 

45°55° 

Sunrise 
0     >    <f     *     ¥     9     *? 

A  M 

A.M. 

A.M. 

5.22 

5.4 

4.40 

9      »?      6      3)      d*      9      H 

6.29 

6  14 

5.53 

9      U      9      *?      O      D      d* 

7.35 

7.23 

7.6 

D     cf     9      V      9      *?     O 

8.42 

8.32 

8.20 

*?      O      J>     d"      <?      #      9 

9.48 

9.42 

9.34 

i/     9      »?      o      D     d1      9 
Noon 

d1      9      #      9      *?      O      D 

10.54 

P.M. 

0.0 

10.51 

P.M. 

0.0 

10.47 

P.M. 

0.0 

O      7)     d1      9      V      9      *? 

1.6 

1.9 

1.13 

9      *?      O      J>     cf      ^?      ¥ 

2.12 

2.18 

2.27 

9      V      9      ^?      O      J      d1 

3.19 

3.28 

3.40 

D      cT      9      V      9      •?      0 

4.25 

4.37 

4.54 

»7      O      D     d1      9     ¥      9 
Sunset 

U      9      •?      O      D      cf      9 

5.31 

P.M. 

6.38 

5.46 

P.M. 

6.56 

6.7 

P.M. 

7.20 

cT     9      V      9      »?     0      J 

7.31 

7.46 

8.7 

O      D      d1      9      V      9      V 

8.25 

8.37 

8.54 

9  •    Y    '  d     >  ;.  <f     9     V 

9.19 

9.28 

9.40 

0     V      9      •?     O      D     c? 

10.12 

10.18 

10.27 

1     cf     ^     ¥    v    f?     O 

Midnight 

»?      O      D      d1      9     '¥      9 

JI.7 

A.M. 

0.0 

11.9 

A.M. 

0.0 

11.13 

A.M. 

0.0 

V      9     -1?      O      D      d1      9 

0.54 

0.51 

0.47 

cf     0    :V     9     ^    ©     1 

1.46 

1.42 

1.34 

G      J)     d*     <?     ¥      9      •? 

2.42 

2.32 

2.20 

9     V    0     1    cf     9     ^ 

3.35 

3.23 

3.6 

0     V     9     ^     O     J)     d" 

4.29 

4.  14 

3.53 

13 


192 


TABLE   OF  PLANETARY  HOURS 
/or 

JUNE  AND  JULY  IN  NORTH  LATITUDE 
DECEMBER  AND  JANUARY  IN  SOUTH  LATITUDE 

HOUR    RULERS  AND   DAYS 

3       M       T       W       T        F        S 

25°35° 

350450 

450550 

Sunrise 

A.M. 

A.M. 

A.M. 

0      D      <3      9      H      9     *? 

5.2 

4.35 

3.55 

9      »?      0      »      d1      9     -V. 

6.12 

5.50 

5.15 

9      V      9      »?      0      3>      d" 

'  7.'82 

7.4 

6.36 

D     df      V     V,     9      »?     0 

6.31 

8.18 

7.57 

»?     0      1>     c?     9     V      9 

9.41 

9.32 

9.18 

V      9      •?     0      I>     d"      9 

10.50 

10.46 

10.39 

Noon 

RM. 

RM. 

RM. 

cf      <?      #      9      »?      0      » 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

0      J>     cf      9     9      9      »? 

1.  10 

1.14 

1.21 

9      »?      0      )     cf      9      V 

2.19 

2.28 

2.42 

9     ¥      9     •?     0     D     rf 

3.29 

3.42 

4.3 

D     cf     9     V      9      »?     0 

4.38 

4.56 

5.24 

»7     0      J>     rf      ^     V      9 

5.48 

5.10 

6.45 

Sunset 

RM. 

RM. 

RM. 

U      9      »?      0      1     $      0 

6.56 

7.25 

8.5 

tf     <?      V      9      •?     0      J) 

7.48 

8.10 

8.45 

0      J     d1      9     V      9     »? 

8.38 

8.56 

9.24 

9     »?     0      )     c^     9     V 

9.E9 

9.42 

10.3 

9     V      9     •?     0      D     d1 

10.19 

10.28 

10.42 

J     <f      9      ¥      9     V      o 

11.10 

11.14 

11.21 

Midnight 

A.M. 

A.M. 

A.M. 

»?      0      >      d*      9      V      9 

0.0 

0.0 

0.0 

V      9      »?     O     »     cf     9 

0.50 

0.46 

0.39 

d"     9     V      9     •?     G     D 

1.41 

1.32 

1.18 

0     )>     c^     9     2;      9     »7 

2.31 

2.18 

1.57 

9     V      0      >     cT      9      i/ 

3.22 

3.4 

2.36 

9      ¥     9      »?     G      D     c? 

4.12 

3.50 

3.15 

TABLE  OF  CONTENTS 


PART  I 

Pages 

Introduction    1-  2 

Chapter      1.     The  Planets,  The  Seven  Spirits 

Before  the  Throne  3-12 

"        II,    Time  and  Place  as  Factors  in 

Calculation  of  the  Horoscope. .  .13-23 

"       III.     Signs  and  Houses   24-31 

"       IV.     The  Rising  Sign  and  the  Twelve 

Houses    32-49 

V.    How  to  Calculate  the  Positions 

of  the  Planets 50-74 

"       VI,     The  Aspects    75-82 

"     VII.    Making  the  Index 83-91 

PART  II 

A  Philosophic  Encyclopedia  of  Astrology. . . .  93-176 

Table  of  Logarithms •  • 177-180 

Table  of  Houses— Sample  Page^ 181-184 

Ephemeris — Sample  Pages  185-186 

Tables  of  Planetary  Hours 187-189 

See  Index  on  Following  Page. 
193 


INDEX 


TO  PART  I 

Airy  signs    (Diagram) 80 

Angles — when  planets  are  in 82 

Aphelion — when  sun  is  farthest  from  earth 18 

Ascendant — aspects  to — influence  upon  health 91 

"         eastern  horizon  is — reason  for 30 

"        how  to  find , 32-49 

Ascension — signs  of  long  and  short — explained 49 

Aspects — conjunction  and  parallel  variable 76 

"        planets  within  orb  of 77 

"        so-called  good  and  evil 76 

"        table  of   etc 75 

"        to  ascendant,  influence  upon  health 91 

"        to   M.    C. — spiritual   advancement 91 

Astrology  applied  to  daily  life 5 

"        danger  of  giving  birth  data  to  others ....  1 

"         difference  between  material  and  religious  23 

"        invaluable  to  medical  man 1 

"         not  to  be  used  for  fortune  telling 12 

"         study  of — prepares  for  initiation 7 

"        study   the   science   yourself 2 

Atmosphere  at  birth  stamps  atoms 23 

"               its  chemical  condition  changes 22 

Aura — of  people  mingle  before  they  meet 78 

"         of  planets  similar  to  those  of  people 79 

Birth  data,  the  key  to  the  soul 1 

Birthplace — highest  point  on  earth 29 

Blood — oxygen  of  first  breath  mixes  with 23 

Bodes  Law   6 

Body — parts  of,  ruled  by  signs 25 

"      produced  by  lunar  forces 60 

Cardinal    signs    (Diagram) 7!* 

194 


INDEX  195 

Climate — conditions   affect   temperament 27 

Clock  of  destiny — stars  so  called 1 

Common  signs   (Diagram) 79 

Conception  and  growth  through  the  signs 28 

Critical  degrees  (table  of) 81 

Day — mean  solar — average  of  year 18 

"      sidereal — measured  from  fixed  star 18 

Daylight    Saving   Act .  ,.o...,.  23 

Declination   of  moon 88 

"          of  part  of  fortune 88 

"         of  planets   87 

Detriment    (see   dignities) 80 

Diagnosis    by    astrology 2 

Diagrams — Cardinal,   Fixed  and  Common  signs 79 

"             Fiery,  Earthy,  Airy  and  Watery  signs  80 

"            house  characteristics   30 

"            latitude   and   longitude 16 

"            time  zones    21 

Dignities — essential    80 

Diurnal  motion  of  the  earth — is  uniform 49 

Dragon's  Head  and  Tail — effect  of 87 

"        "            "        "      how  found   60 

Earth — poles  change   9 

Earthy  signs   (Diagram) 80 

Elevation — near   the   mid-heaven 82 

Ephemeris    17 

Equinox — precession  of  26 

Essential  dignities   80 

Evil — there  is  no 76 

Exaltation   (see  dignities) 80-81 

Eye — effect  on,  of  Saturn  retrograde 74 

Evolution  as  indicated  by  precession 25 

"         as  influenced  by  fixed  stars 27 

Fall   (see  dignities) 80-81 

Fiery    signs    (diagram) 80 


196  INDEX 

Fixed  signs   (diagrams) 79 

Fixed  stars   (see  Stars) 

Fortune — Part  of  60-61 

"        Part  of,  decimation  same  as  Sun 88-89 

"         telling  to  be  avoided 12 

Greenwich — base  line  for  longitude 17 

"          Mean  Time — how  to  figure  and  use 60 

"          Mean  Time — brought  into  following  day      66 

Horoscope — charts,   house   characteristics 30 

"  "         orb   illustrated    78 

"  "        planets  as  calculated 65,  71,  88 

"  "        rising   signs  compared 46 

"  "         signs  on  cusps  as  calculated 

35,  40,  42,  44 

"        natural — cast  by  rules  of  astrology 28 

"        no  evil   76 

"        of  world  changes  from  year  to  year 27 

Houses  and  signs   24 

"      are  divisions  of  earth 25 

"      astronomical  basis  of    49 

"      characteristics    SO 

"       correspond  to  signs   28 

Index — making  the 83-89 

Initiation  under  the  direction  of  Neptune 7 

Intellectual  Zodiac — first  degree  of  Aries 26-27 

Jupiter  thrown  off  from  Sun 11 

Latitude — chart  illustrating  16 

"        described    14 

Law  unto  ourselves   12 

Logarithms — how  to  find  and  use 53 

Longitude — chart  illustrating 16 

"          described    15 

"          used  to  locate  movable  planets 17 

Man  is  made  in  image  of  God 79 

Meridian  of  longitude  15 


INDEX  197 

Medical  man — astrology  invaluable  to 1 

Mercury — inferior  or  superior 10 

"Message  of   Stars"  deals    with  medical    phase  of 

astrology    2 

Midheaven   above   birthplace 29 

Moon — side  we  never  see 1 

Nebular  theory  implies  first  cause 3 

Neptune — a  great  spirit  from  creative  hierarchies . .  7 

"        not  part  of  solar  system 6 

"         Sun  rises  in  west,  on 10 

"        works  with  those  preparing  for  initiation  7 

Orb   described    77 

Parallel — aspect   explained    75 

"        how  to  find 87 

Parent — astrology   an   aid   to 2 

Part  of  Fortune — how  to  calculate 60-63 

Perihelion — Sun  nearest  earth 18 

Place  located  by  latitude  and  longitude 14 

Planets  below  the  earth  have  less  influence 30 

"        distance  from  Sun   6 

"        embodiment  of  great  spiritual  intelligence . .  4 

"        hourly  motion  in  orbits 8 

"        how  to  calculate  position  of 50-71 

"        inclination  of  axes 8 

"        seven  spirits  before  the  throne 3 

"        table  of 24 

"        time  occupied  by  diurnal  rotation  of 8 

Religions — all  mention  seven  planetary  spirits 5 

Retrogradation — meaning   of 72 

Rising  sign   32 

Sight — spiritual    78 

Signs  and  houses 24-31 

"    classification  of  79-80 

"    intercepted — how   to   find 37 

"    of  long  ascension 49 


198  INDEX 

"    ruling  different  parts  of  body 25 

Solar  day  18 

"  system  considered  as  body  of  God 4 

Stars  do  not  compel 77 

"  fixed — bring  about  changes  in  climate 27 

"  fixed — twinkling  pulsations 7 

Sun — inclination  of  axis  to  plane  of  ecliptic 9 

"  rises  in  west  on  Neptune  and  Uranus 10 

"  rotation  on  axis 8 

"  threw  off  planets  at  proper  distances 11 

"  throne  of  God 12 

"  time — difference  between  sun  and  clock 18 

Tables — aspects  75 

"  critical  degrees  81 

"  departments  of  life  ruled  by  houses 31 

"  hourly  motion  of  planets  in  orbits 8 

"  illustrating  Bode's  Law 6 

"  inclination  of  axes  of  planets 8 

"  index  of  aspects,  etc 89 

"  planetary  powers  81 

"  signs,  planets  and  aspects 24 

"  signs  ruling  parts  of  the  body 25 

"  time  of  diurnal  rotation  of  planets 8 

"  time  of  orbital  revolution  of  planets 7 

Time— Greenwich  Mean  (G.  M.  T.) 50 

"  sidereal — how  to  find 33 

"  standard — adopted  in  America 19 

"  true  local — how  to  find 32 

"  when  child  draws  first  breath 22 

"  zones  in  Unitgd  States 20 

Watery  signs    (diagram) 80 

Zodiac — a  circle  divided  into  360  degrees 25 

"  natural  and  intellectual 26 

"  new  degree  rises  every  four  minutes 13 

"  signs  of  61 


xrf  % 

BY  MAX  HEINDEL  AND  AUGUSTA  Foss  HEINDEL 

One  of  the  most  complete  systems  of  character  de- 
lineation and  reading  the  horoscope  for  medical 
diagnosis  yet  given  to  modern  astrology. 

With  many  nontechnical  articles  to  interest  the 
general  student  of  the  occult,  a  simple  method  of 

PROGRESSION  AND  PREDICTION, 

and  a  new   index  for    quickly   locating    desired  in- 
formation, it  is  indeed  a  classic  in  its  realm. 

In  the  section  on  Medical  Astrology  the  authors 
have  given  a  system  that  is  based  on  years  of  prac- 
tical experience.  Thirty-six  example  horoscopes  are 
included,  and  the  subject  is  dealt  with  most  thor- 
oughly. 

YOU  NEED  THIS  BOOK! 
708  Pages.  Cloth  Bound.  $3.50  Postpaid. 

The  Rosicrucian  Fellowship, 

Mt.  Ecclesia 
Oceanside,  California. 


I860  TO  DATE.    PRICE,  25c  EACH  TEAR 


THIS  18  A  SUPERIOR  EPHEMERIS 

ISSUED  AT  A  SMALLER  PRICE 
THAN  Is  FREQUENTLY  CHARGED  BY  OTHERS 
A  glance  at  this  publication  will  at  once  show  the 
Astrologer  a  number  of  advantages  in  our  arrange- 
ment.   The  times  and  places  of  New  Moons,  Full 
Moon   and   Eclipses   are   plainly   marked,   also   the 
Moon's  Node.    Tables  of  logarithms  are  given  for  24 
hours.    The  latitude  of  all  the  planets  is  included. 

The  type  is  as  large  as  used  in  this  book,  the  print 
is  clear.    It  will  save  eye  strain. 


SIMPLIFIED 

tmtttftr:  SaUss  of 


Latitudes  25  to  60  Degrees,  Inclusive 

Volume  1.  Volume  2.  Volume  3. 

25-36  degrees.  37-48  degrees  49-69  degrees 

WITH  LONGITUDES  and  LATITUDES 

of  about 

FIFTEEN  HUNDRED  CITIES  OF  THE  WORLD 
These  Tables  of  Houses  are  printed  in  size  and  style 
uniform   with  our    Simplified  Scientific   Ephemeris; 
large  type,  clear  print  and  fine  paper. 

—  50  cents  each  Postpaid.  — 
The  Rosicrucian  Fellowship, 

Mt.  Ecclesia 
Oceanside,  California. 


Courses 

TVT 

XX  v 

The  Rosicrucian  Philosophy  and 
Astrology 

( 1 )  Rosicrucian  Philosophy : 

Using  the  Cosmo-Conception  by  Max  Heindel  as  a 
textbook,  this  course  of  twelve  lessons  points  to  a 
logical  explanation  of  the  origin,  evolution,  and  fu- 
ture development  of  mankind,  and  opens  the  way  to  a 
deeper  knowledge  of  this  great  subject.  This  philos- 
ophy seeks  to  make  Christianity  a  living  factor  in  the 
world,  and  to  combine  the  eternal  facts  of  Science,  Art, 
and  Religion.  This  course  is  open  to  all  those  inter- 
ested. 

(2)  Astrology: 

We  want  to  assist  you  in  helping  yourself  and 
others.  This  correspondence  course  will  teach  you  the 
importance  of  astrology  as  a  phase  of  religion  and  a 
Divine  Science.  The  one  restriction  is  that  our  pupils 
may  not  prostitute  the  knowledge  thus  obtained  for 
gain  in  any  way.  Anyone  not  engaged  in  fortune 
telling  or  similar  methods  of  commercializing  spir- 
itual knowledge  may  be  admitted  to  this  course. 

For  admission  to  these  courses  address, 

(I)  Philosophy  Secretary. 

(II)  Astrology  Secretary. 

The  Rosicrucian  Fellowship, 

Mt.  Ecclesia 
Oceanside,  California. 


THE 


BY  MAX  HEINDEL 
Eighth  Edition  With  New  70  Page  Index 

This  book  gives  a  complete  outline  of  the  Western 
Wisdom  Teaching  as  far  as  it  may  be  made  public  at 
the  present  time.  The  Rosicrucian  Brotherhood  from 
time  to  time  gives  out  occult  teachings  to  the  public 
in  such  a  manner  that  their  expression  conforms  to 
the  intellectual  development  of  the  times.  This  is  the 
latest  of  their  communications. 

Max  Heindel  was  the  accredited  agent  of  the  Rosi- 
crucian Brotherhood,  commissioned  to  give  the  con- 
tents of  this  book  to  the  world.  There  is  no  other  book 
that  contains  so  complete  an  exposition  of  the  factors 
that  enter  into  the  creation  of  the  universe  and  of 
man  and  all  its  statements  are  in  keeping  with  the  re- 
sults of  scientific  research. 

Part  I  is  a  treatise  on  the  Visible  and  the  Invisible 
Worlds,  Man  and  the  Method  of  Evolution,  Rebirth 
and  the  Law  of  Cause  and  Effect. 

Part  II  takes  up  the  scheme  of  Evolution  in  general 
and  the  Evolution  of  the  Solar  System  and  the  Earth 
in  particular. 

Part  III  treats  of  Christ  and  His  Mission,  Future 
Development  of  Man  and  Initiation,  Esoteric  Train- 
ing and  a  Safe  Method  of  Acquiring  First-hand 
Knowledge. 

616  Pages.  Cloth  Bound.  $2.00  Postfree. 

The  Rosicrucian  Fellowship, 

Mt.  Ecclesm 
Oceanside,  California. 


txf 


CIprtstfemttg 


ANCIENT  TRUTHS  IN  MODERN  DRESS 
Price  lOc  Each,  Postfree 

No.    1.  The  Riddle  of  Life  and  Death. 

No.     2.  Where  Are  the  Dead? 

No.     3.  Spiritual  Sight  and  the  Spiritual  Worlds. 

No.    4.  Sleep,    Dreams,    Trance,   Hypnotism,    Mediumship 

and  Insanity. 

No.     6.  Death  and  Life  in  Purgatory. 

No.    6.  Life  and  Activity  in  Heaven. 

No.     7.  Birth  a  Fourfold  Event. 

No.    8.  The  Science  of  Nutrition,  Health  and  Protracted 

Youth. 

No.    9.  The  Astronomical  Allegories  of  the  Bible. 

No.  10.  Astrology;   Its   Scope  and   Limitations. 

No.  11.  Spiritual   Sight  and  Insight. 

No.  12.  Parsifal. 

No.  13.  The  Angels  as  Factors  in  Evolution. 

No,  14.  Lucifer,  Tempter  or  Benefactor? 

No.  15.  The    Mystery    of   Golgotha     and   the    Cleansing 

Blood. 

No.  16.  The  Star  of  Bethlehem;  A  Mystic  Fact. 

No.  17.  The  Mystery  of  the  Holy  Grail. 

No.  18.  The  Lord's  Prayer. 

No.  19.  The  Corning  Force;  Vril  or  What? 

No.  20.  Fellowship  and  the  Coming  Race. 

These  lectures  are  particularly  suitable  for  beginners. 
Read  consecutively,  they  give  a  comprehensive  outline  of  our 
philosophy. 

THEY  FIT  THE  POCKET 

and  allow  a  busy  man  to  utilize  time  on  cars  en  route  to  or 
from  business. 

GIVE  ONE  TO  A  FRIEND 
It  is  an  inexpensive  and  a  helpful  gift. 

The  Rosicrucian  Fellowship, 

Mt.  Ecclesia 
Oceanside,  California. 


AN  ELEMENTARY  EXPOSITION 

BY  MAX  HEINDEL 
This  is  the  Book  for  the  busy  man. 
who  is  seeking  a  solution  to  the  Great  Mystery  called 
life  but  lacks  leisure  to   wade    through   volumes   of 
metaphysical  speculations.    The  lucid  and  logical  ex- 
planations carry  conviction — they  bear 

THE  STAMP  OF  TRUTH 

Nevertheless,  the  language  is  so  simple,  clear  and  de- 
void of  technicalities  that  a  child  can  understand  its 
message.    It  is  therefore  specially  suited  to  beginners. 
198  pp.  cloth.  $1.50  Postfree. 


Mofo  £haU  Me  mnnfa  Christ 

V-  *"  N» 

at  ^ts  Coming  ? 


BY  MAX  HEINDEL 

This  book  tells  us  that  Christ  will  return  in  an 
etheric,  not  a  physical  body.  Hence  mankind  must 
develop  the  etheric  body  to  the  point  where  they  can 
'function  in  it  consciously  before  Christ  will  return. 
Then  they  will  possess  the  inner  spiritual  perception 
by  which  they  will  be  able  to  recognize  Him. 

These  matters  are  fully  elucidated  in  this  book. 

29  Pages.  Paper  Bound.  15c  Postfree. 

The  Rosicrucian  Fellowship, 

Mt.  Ecclesia 
Oceanside,  California. 


Catholicism 

BY  MAX  HEINDEL 


An  Esoteric  Treatise  on  the  Underlying  Facts  re- 
garding these  two  great  Institutions  as  determined  by 
occult  investigation. 

It  explains  in  terms  of  Mystic  Masonry  the  con- 
flict between  the  Sons  of  Cain  and  the  Sons  of 
Seth,  and  unravels  the  allegory  dealing  with  the  build- 
ing of  Solomon's  Temple,  the  Queen  of  Sheba,  and 
the  Grand  Master,  Hiram  Abiff  . 

If  you  are  interested  in  the  symbols  of  Masonry,  in 
knowing  the  source  of  these  mysteries  which  have 
come  down  to  us  from  past  ages,  this  is  the  book  you 
want. 

Only  a  trained  Seer  could  have  read  the  Akashic 
Records  of  the  past  and  given  such  a  clear  explanation 
of  their  meaning. 

In  addition,  read  what  the  author  says  about  the 
famous  Philosopher's  Stone  of  the  Alchemists,  the 
Path  of  Initiation,  and  the  Coming  Age. 

This  Book  Should  Be  in  Every  Mason's  Library. 
98  Pages.  Cloth  Bound.  $1.00  Postfree. 

The  Rosicrucian  Fellowship, 

Mt.  Ecclesia 
Oceanside,  California. 


:%  ^0*2  Cross 

The  American  Mystic  Monthly 


A  Monthly  Magazine  of  Mystic  Light  devoted  to 
philosophy,  occultism,  mystic  masonry,  astrology,  and 
healing. 

Those  who  desire  knowledge  and  guidance 
along  the  Path  of  the  Western  Wisdom 
Teachings  will  find  this  magazine  a  constant 
aid. 

It  expounds  and  supports  occult  and  mystical 
philosophy  in  a  most  instructive  and  interesting  man- 
ner. It  carries  such  special  departments  as : 

Questions  and  Answers  on  Mystical  Subjects 
Editorial  Discussion  of  Current  Events 
Astrological  Readings 
Occult  Stories 

One  of  the  foremost  magazines  of  its  kind  in  America. 

Price  $2.00  per  year  in  U.  S.  and  Canada. 
Other  Countries,  $2.25. 


The  Eosicrucian  Fellowship, 

Mt.  Ecclesia 
Oceanside,  California. 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

Return  this  material  to  the  library 

from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


10 - 


3  115801125  5550 


RN  REGIONAL  LIBRARVFAC;L^ 


A    000118834     1 


